2008 Odyssey
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Odyssey was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Introduction
i
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０３：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０００２
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
Event Data Recorders
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Introduction
WARNING:
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component.
ii
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０３：２２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０００３
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
These signal words mean:
on the vehicle.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０３：３２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０００４
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
2008 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ...................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .......................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ......................................... 63
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control and HomeLink).......... 209
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ............................................................................ 359
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ...................................................................................................... 375
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)...................................................... 405
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) ..................................... 453
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ................................................ 483
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ......... 501
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ........................................................................................... 505
Index ............................................................................................................................... ...................................... I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
1
00X31-SHJ-6310
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
How to operate the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system, the audio system, rear
entertainment and other
convenience features.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Features
Technical Information
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Index
Service Information Summary
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Maintenance
Driving
Before Driving
Overview of Contents
2
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０００７
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
＊
＊ : If equipped
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P.9, 27)
(P.65, 66)
(P.77)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
GAUGES
MIRROR
CONTROLS
POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
GLOVE BOXES
HEATING AND
COOLING SYSTEM/
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
RETRACTABLE CENTER TRAYAUXILIARY
INPUT JACK
(P.191)
(P.151)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS
(P.184)
(P.186)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVER
(P.378)
(P.183)
(P.201)
(P.210)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET
(P.195)
(P.283)
(P.203)
(P.361)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.192)
(P.362)
(P.9, 27)
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０００８
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1:
2:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH
PARKING SENSOR
SYSTEM SWITCH
MOONROOF
SWITCH
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
SWITCH
PEDAL POSITION
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
CLOCK
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCH
/
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON
HORN
(P.82)
(P.35)
NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
BUTTONS
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
SWITCH
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
LIGHT
CONTROL
SWITCH
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS
AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
(P.193)
(P.162)
(P.189)
(P.158)
(P.387)
(P.352)
(P.387)
(P.282)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
BUTTONS
(P.326)
(P.141)
(P.135, 138)
(P.134)
(P.135)
(P.319)
(P.281)
(P.140)
(P.140)
(P.221, 285)
(P.205)
1
2
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０００９
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 14
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 15
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 21
..Seat Belt System Components . 21
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22
Automatic Seat Belt
.............................Tensionners . 23
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 24
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 25
......Airbag System Components . 25
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 27
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 33
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 35
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 35
.............................Airbag Service . 36
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 38
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 38
All Children Should Sit in a Back
...........................................Seat . 39
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39
If You Must Drive with
.....................Several Children . 41
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 41
...Additional Safety Precautions . 41
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 43
.......................Protecting Infants . 43
.........Protecting Small Children . 44
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 46
....................Installing a Child Seat . 47
...............................With LATCH . 48
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 51
..............................With a Tether . 53
...........Protecting Larger Children . 56
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 56
..................Using a Booster Seat . 57
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 58
...Additional Safety Precautions . 59
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60
...................................Safety Labels . 61
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１０
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
15
5938
407
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Restrain All Children
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
6
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(8)
(9)
(9)
(11)
(10)
(7)
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：３８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What you should do:
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
27
31
33
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０４：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor f rontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
What you should do:
10
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０５：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.
The door and tailgate open indicator
appears on the multi-information
display to indicate when a specific
door or the tailgate is not tightly
closed.
38 59
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０５：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
When one or more doors are not
tightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’
message will come on.
When the tailgate is not tightly
closed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.
When both tailgate and one or more
doors are not tightly closed, the
‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.
Locking the doors and the tailgate
reduces the chance of someone
being thrown out of the vehicle
during a crash, and it helps prevent
passengers from accidentally
opening a door or the tailgate and
falling out.
Locking the doors and the tailgate
also helps prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate when you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors and the tailgate, and page
for how the door and tailgate
monitor indicator works.
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See page for
how to set them.
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See pages
and for how to set them.
75
152
151
125123
On Touring models
Except Touring models
Adjust the Front Seats2.
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０５：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you extend the adjustable driver’s
foot pedals (Touring models only,
see page ), or investigate
whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
See pages and for how to
adjust the front seats.
After you adjust a manual seat, rock
it back and forth to make sure the
seat is locked in position.
141
193
168 169
CONTINUED
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０５：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See pages and for how to
adjust the seat-backs.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
168 170
171
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Protecting Adults and Teens
14
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０５：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００１９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
The center seating position of the
third row has a detachable seat belt
that can be unlatched and retracted
into the ceiling to allow the seat to be
folded down. See page for how to
unlatch and relatch the seat belt.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
Theplus-oneseatthatcanbe
installed in the center seating
position of the second row also has a
detachable seat belt.
16
CONTINUED
Except U.S. LX and Canadian DX
models
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
０７／１１／０８ １８：４７：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The front seats and second row seats
have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
adjust the height of an anchor,
squeeze the two release buttons, and
slide the anchor up or down as
needed (it has four positions).
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Pull out the anchor latch and the
latch plate from the holding slots in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
Theplus-oneseatthatcanbe
installed in the center seating
position of the second row also has a
detachable seat belt.
21
Except U.S. LX and Canadian DX
models
Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in the
Center Position of the Third Row
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
RELEASE
BUTTONS
LATCH
PLATE
ANCHOR
LATCH
０７／１１／０８ １８：４７：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Insert the hook at the end of the
anchor latch into the anchor buckle
by lining up the triangle marks on
the anchor latch in and buckle. Make
sure the belt is not twisted. Push the
anchor latch until it locks. Then
follow the procedure for fastening
and positioning an ordinary seat belt
(see page ).
To unlatch the detachable anchor
latch, insert your ignition key into
the slot on the side of the anchor
buckle. Line up the triangle marks
on the plate and buckle when
reattaching the belt and buckle.
15
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
TRIANGLE
MARKS
ANCHOR
BUCKLE
ANCHOR
LATCH
ANCHOR LATCH
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Using the seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：０４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Protecting Adults and Teens
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
CONTINUED
Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Protecting Adults and Teens
20
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：２２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
88
30 31
CONTINUED
On Touring model
Seat Belt System Components
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page ).
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Any objects, such as a folded-down
second row seat, that is touching
the rear of the seat-back.
52
15
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
22
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating position on the third seat and
the second row plus-one seat
(depending on models) is equipped
with a detachable seat belt that has
two parts: a small latch plate and an
anchor buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page .15
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：４７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
).
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
33
436
Honda
Warranty Information
do not deploy
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
24
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０６：５６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００２９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
(8) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(9) Front Impact Sensors
(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(11) Side Impact Sensors
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Side Curtain Airbags
(7) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(15) Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Indicator
(12) Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensors
(13) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
(9)
(2)
(15)
(5)
(11)
(4)
(11)
(6)
(11)
(14)
(11)
(1)
(3)
(11)
(4)
(7)
(11)
(8)
(5)
(12)
(13)
(10)
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０７：０４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page ).
27
23
30
31
33
32
30
21
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０７：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
33
34
35
35
CONTINUED
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０７：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the airbag helps protect your
head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).35
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０７：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
latched
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０７：３６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Second-row passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
30
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０７：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
A second row passenger pushing
or pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat, the
floor behind it, or a folded second
row seat.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is properly
positioned on the floor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the front passenger’s seat and its
sensors.
35
436
CONTINUED
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０７：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
35
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Additional Information About Your Airbags
32
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
In a Side Impact
In a Rollover
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags
or seat belt tensioners. 88
On Touring models
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator
Works
34
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００３９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
andthengooff(seepage ).Ifit
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
68
89
On Touring models
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
not
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
Canada
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during a crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
An airbag ever inflates.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
36
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：３６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
If water or
another liquid soaks into the seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Do not remove or modif y a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
43
5956
59
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
38
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
35
56
CONTINUED
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０８：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
40
DASHBOARDSUN VISORS
SUN VISORS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０９：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained. If you ever have to carry
a group of children, and a child must
ride in front:
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
56
18
15
168
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０９：２２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
If a child
wraps a loose seat belt around
their neck, they can be seriously
or fatally injured. (See pages
and for how to activate
and deactivate the lockable
retractor.)
This can prevent children
from accidentally falling out (see
page ).
This
will prevent unintended use of the
doors.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
51 52
157
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
thelockableretractoris
activated, and the belt is fully
retracted and locked.
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors.
Use the power sliding door main
switch to prevent children f rom
operating the sliding doors.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
42
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０９：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the
second row, a rear-facing child seat
maypreventthedriverorafront
passenger from moving their seat as
far back as recommended, or from
locking their seat-back in the desired
position.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the second
or third row, but not in the front.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０９：３８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Protecting Infants and Small Children
44
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０９：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００４９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
35
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０９：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the rear seating
positions.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat
46
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０９：５８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in a second row seat:
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) in the two second row
seats and the center seating position
of the third row.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
48
LOWER
ANCHORS
BUTTON
Rigid type
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：１３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Other LATCH-compatible seats have
a flexible-type connector as shown
above.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted, then tighten the strap
according to the seat maker’s
instructions.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint, over the seat-back and
through the grab rail.4.
5. 6.
7.
171
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
ANCHOR
TETHER
STRAP HOOK
TETHER STRAP
Flexible type
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the center seating position of
the third row:
Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor latch and retract the seat
belt all the way into the ceiling.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch in their holding slots (see
page ).
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
Followsteps1through4ofthe
second row installation on pages
and .
The center seating position of the
third row has an anchorage point on
the tailgate sill.
Slide the anchor cover to open it.
1.
2. 3.
48
16
49
Installing a Child Seat
50
ANCHORAGE POINT
BUTTON
LOWER ANCHORS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
thirdrow,makesurethedetachable
seat belt is properly installed (see
page ).
Remove the head restraint (see
page ). Make sure the removed
head restraint is secured in the
cargo area. Reinstall the head
restraint when the child seat is
removed.
Followsteps6and7onpage .
1.4.
5. 49
16
171
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
ANCHOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
5.4.2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
52
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Each second row bucket seat has a
tether anchorage point at the bottom
of the seat-back.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row seats.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
1.
51
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Second Row Installation
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
TETHER
STRAP
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The center seating position of the
third row has an anchorage point on
the tailgate sill.
Each outside seating position of the
third row has an anchorage point on
the seat-back.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
2.
3.
Third Row Installation
Installing a Child Seat
54
ANCHORAGE POINT
Center seating position
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK
ANCHOR
ANCHORAGE POINTS
Outside seating position
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１０：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００５９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the head restraint (see
page ). Make sure the removed
head restraint is secured in the
cargo area. Reinstall the head
restraint when the child seat is
removed.
To use the anchor, pull up the
anchor cover.
Slide the anchor cover to open it.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), route the
tether strap over the top of the
seat-back.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
2.
3.
1.
(Outside seating position)
(Center seating position)
4. 5.
51
171
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Outside seating position
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Center seating position
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１１：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
56
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１１：１５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
3.
4.
5.
46
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１１：２４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
5615
Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Physical Size
Maturity
58
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１１：３４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
59
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１１：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the tailgate open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
60
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１１：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
CONTINUED
Canadian models
U.S. models only
U.S. models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
61
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１１：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
U.S. models Canadian models
U.S. models Canadian models
Safety Labels
62
HOOD DOORJAMB
RADIATOR CAP
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１２：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 64
............................Instrument Panel . 65
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 67
.............................................Gauges . 77
.............Multi-Information Display . 81
Controls Near the Steering
.........................................Wheel . 133
Windshield Wipers and
.................................Washers . 134
Rear Window Wiper and
...................................Washer . 135
....Turn Signal and Headlights . 135
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 139
...............Hazard Warning Button . 140
...............Rear Window Defogger . 140
........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 141
.............................Keys and Locks . 142
......................Immobilizer System . 143
..............................Ignition Switch . 144
.....................Remote Transmitter . 145
Opening or Closing the Power
.........................Sliding Doors . 148
Opening or Closing the Power
..................................Tailgate . 148
....................................Door Locks . 151
....................Power Door Locks . 151
Auto Door Locking/
..............................Unlocking . 152
............Childproof Door Locks . 157
..........................................Tailgate . 157
..........................Power Tailgate . 158
.................................Sliding Doors . 161
...............................................Seats . 167
..................................Seat Heaters . 183
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 184
............................Power Windows . 186
.......................................Moonroof . 189
...........................................Mirrors . 190
...............................Parking Brake . 192
.Adjustable Driver’s Foot Pedals . 193
.........Interior Convenience Items . 194
..........Retractable Center Tray . 195
.....................Beverage Holders . 195
................Integrated Sunshade . 197
....................Sunglasses Holder . 197
................Conversation Mirror . 198
...................................Sun Visor . 198
............................Vanity Mirror . 199
...................Rear Compartment . 199
................Second Row Console . 199
...............In-Floor Storage Area . 200
..............................Glove Boxes . 201
...........................Center Pocket . 202
...............................Coin Pocket . 202
........Accessory Power Sockets . 203
.......................AC Power Outlet . 203
...............................Interior Lights . 205
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
63
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１２：２２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６８
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
＊
＊
: If equipped
Control Locations
64
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES
RETRACTABLE
CENTER TRAY
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
AUXILIARY
INPUT JACK
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
(P.192)
(P.203)
(P.283) (P.195)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SHIFT LEVER
(P.378)
(P.183)
(P.210)
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
(P.65, 66)
GAUGES
MIRROR
CONTROLS
(P.191)
POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
(P.151)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM
BUTTONS
(P.184)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.186)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.361)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.362)
(P.77)
GLOVE BOXES
(P.201)
HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM/
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１２：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００６９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX models
65
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
POWER SLIDING
DOOR INDICATOR
DOOR AND
TAILGATE OPEN
INDICATOR
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
FUEL ECONOMY
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
SECURITY
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.70)
(P.75)
(P.76)
(P.34, 67)
(P.75)
(P.76)
(P.21, 68)
(P.35, 68)
(P.74)
(P.75)
(P.70)
(P.70)
(P.75)
(P.75)
(P.73)
(P.73)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR
(P.73)
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
(P.67, 471)
(P.67, 472)
(P.67, 471)
(P.72, 389)
(P.71, 388)
(P.69, 384)
(P.69, 473)
０７／１１／０８ １８：４７：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Touring models
66
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.76)
(P.21, 68)
(P.35, 68)
(P.75)
(P.75)
(P.70)
(P.70)
(P.70)
(P.76)
FUEL ECONOMY
INDICATOR
(P.75)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.75)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
SYSTEM MESSAGE
INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS) INDICATOR
(P.74)
(P.34, 67)
(P.73)
(P.73)
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
INDICATOR
(P.73)
(P.73)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS
INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.67, 472)
(P.67, 471)
(P.71, 391)
(P.69, 384)
(P.69, 473)
(P.67, 471)
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１２：４８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
For more information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, automatic seat
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
88
88
88
34
88
472
471
471
On Touring models
On Touring models
On Touring models
On Touring models
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
67
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１２：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page .
21
88
89
35
On Touring models
On Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
68
U.S. Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１３：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
If it remains on after you have
fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
LOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
1.
2.
89
88
88
384
473
On Touring models
On Touring models
On Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
69
U.S. Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１３：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator has three functions:This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
gooffifyouhaveinserteda
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink and the engine
will not start (see page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. See page for more
information.
1.
2.
3.
89
89
143
386
386
386
On Touring models
On Touring models
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation IndicatorImmobilizer System
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
70
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１３：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). For more
information, see page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure on the multi-
information display, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
have the flat tire repaired as soon as
possible. If two or more tires are
underinflated, call a professional
towing service. For more
information, see page .
This indicator has two functions:
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
Check the tire pressure monitor on
the multi-information display and
determinethecause(seepage ).
Your vehicle has Michelin PAX tires.
Repair or replacement of PAX tires
must be done by a Honda dealer or
an authorized Michelin PAX system
dealer. For more information, see
page .
1.
88
457
480
388
393
480
449
CONTINUED
On Touring models
U.S. model (If equipped)
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Instruments and Controls
71
０７／１１／０８ １８：４８：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages and ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page
.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
2.
395
430 433
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
Indicators
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
72
０７／１１／０８ １８：４８：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem in the high beam headlight’s
circuit. Take your vehicle to a dealer
to have it checked (see page ).
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. See page
for information on fog light
operation.
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the high beam headlight’s circuit.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
On Touring models, this indicator
also comes on when the light switch
is in AUTO and the lights turn on
automatically.
89
136
138
138
On Touring model
On Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Lights On Indicator
Instruments and Controls
73
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
INDICATOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１３：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You will also see a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comesonasareminderthatyou
must refuel soon. When the indicator
comes on, there is about 1.08 US gal
(4.1
) of fuel remaining in the tank
before the reading reaches E. There
is a small reserve of fuel remaining
in the tank when the reading does
reach E.
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
comes on (see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘WASHER
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
89
89
424
On Touring models
On Canadian models
On Canadian Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Fuel IndicatorWasher Level Indicator
74
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１４：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００７９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
It goes off when your vehicle uses
extra fuel.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, there is
a problem in the power sliding door
system. With this indicator on, move
themainswitchonthedashboardto
the OFF position, and have the
system checked by your dealer as
soon as possible. You can still open
or close each sliding door manually.
For more information on the power
sliding doors, see page .
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK LEFT
SLIDING DOOR’’ or ‘‘CHECK
RIGHT SLIDING DOOR’’ message
on the multi-information display (see
page ).
The appropriate light comes on in
this indicator if the tailgate or any
door is not closed tightly.
All the lights in the indicator come
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
The door and tailgate open indicator
also appears on the multi-information
display.89
161
319
319
On Touring models
On Touring models
On EX and EX-L models
On EX-L and Touring models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Cruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Fuel Economy Indicator
Power Sliding
Door Indicator
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator
Instruments and Controls
75
U.S. Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１４：１５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multi-
information display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page ) to see the message (see
page ).
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc. This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
remindsyouthatitistimetotake
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
for more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
82
87
318
407
On Touring modelsOn LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
System Message
Indicator
Security System Indicator
76
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０７／１１／０８ １８：４８：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, the pointer
may rise to the upper zone. If it
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. For
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system, see page .469
Temperature Gauge
Fuel Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
77
SPEEDOMETER
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
TACHOMETER
Touring models
SELECT/RESET KNOB
SELECT/RESET KNOB
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY
LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX models
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
０７／１１／０８ １８：４８：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
To switch the display, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, what you last selected is
displayed.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
The information display shows the
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life,
outside temperature (if equipped),
and maintenance item code(s).
For information about the multi-
information display, see page .81
On Touring models
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Gauges
Odometer
Information Display
Trip Meter
78
INFORMATION DISPLAY
TRIP METER A
ENGINE OIL
LIFE
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
ODOMETER
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.
TRIP METER B
０７／１１／０８ １８：４８：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
±±
−−
−−−
−−−
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
select/reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
To adjust the outside temperature
indicator, press and hold the select/
reset knob for 10 seconds. The
following sequence will appear for 1
secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4,
3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the select/
reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
CONTINUED
On EX and EX-L models
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
Instruments and Controls
79
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１４：５１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .472
407
Gauges
Maintenance Minder Check Fuel Cap Message
80
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１４：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably.
Others help to keep you aware of the
periodic maintenance your vehicle
needs for continued trouble-free
driving.
You can also customize some vehicle
control settings to your liking with
the multi-information display and the
two buttons on the steering wheel
(see page ).
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote
transmitter, the display shows
‘‘Welcome DRIVER 1’’ or ‘‘Welcome
DRIVER 2’’ depending on which
remote transmitter you use. The
driver’s ‘‘ID’’ is detected by the
transmitter. For more information
about driver’s ‘‘ID’’, see page .
If you use the key to unlock the
driver’s door, the display only shows
‘‘Welcome.’’ This means the system
cannot recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’
or ‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, you
cannot use the customized settings
on the multi-information display (see
page ).
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ACCESSORY (I) position, the
display shows ‘‘Goodbye.’’
101
101
149
CONTINUED
On Touring models only
Normal Display Messages
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
81
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１５：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The multi-information display
consists of two segments; an upper
segment and a lower segment.
To change the display, press the
INFObuttononthesteeringwheel
repeatedly until the desired
information appears (see page ).
Messages in the trip computer
include:
In normal display mode, the upper
segment displays the trip computer.
The lower segment displays the
odometer, Trip A/B, outside
temperature, compass, and engine
oil life and maintenance message.
INST.MPG(U.S.models)/
INST.L/100 km (Canadian
models): Your vehicle’s current
fuel mileage.
When you turn off the engine,
INST. MPG or INST. L/100 km is
also reset.
RANGE: The estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank. This
distance is estimated from the fuel
economy you received over the
last several miles, so it will vary
withchangesinspeed,traffic,etc.
When the battery is disconnected,
or you refuel, RANGE is also reset.
84
Multi-Information Display
82
LOWER SEGMENT
UPPER SEGMENT
INFO BUTTON
SEL/RESET BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１５：１３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
AVERAGE FUEL A/B: This
shows your vehicle’s average fuel
economy in mpg (U.S. models) or
/100 km (Canadian models)
since you last reset Trip A or Trip
B. When you select Trip B in the
lower segment by pressing the
SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel, or the select/reset
knob on the instrument panel,
AVERAGE FUEL B appears on
the upper segment.
You can customize the Trip A and
AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition
on the multi-information display (see
page ).
The average fuel mileage will be
reset when you reset the trip meter,
or if the vehicle’s battery goes dead
or is disconnected.
ELAPSED TIME: The time
traveled since you last reset the
trip computer.
When you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.
You can customize the ELAPSED
TIME reset condition on the multi-
information display (see page
).
AVERAGE SPEED: The average
speed you are traveling.
When you reset Trip A,
AVERAGE SPEED is also reset.
112
114
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
83
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１５：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you press the INFO button while
AVERAGE FUEL is displayed, you
will see the tire pressure monitor in
both segments. This monitor is a
part of the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS). See page for
more information.
Pressing the INFO button again
brings the display back to the initial
display of the trip computer ‘‘INST.
MPG’’ (U.S. models) or ‘‘INST. L/
100 km’’ (Canadian models).
393
Multi-Information Display
84
Press the INFO button
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１５：２５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００８９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In the lower segment, each time you
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel, the display changes
from ‘‘Trip A/Odometer’’ to ‘‘Trip A/
Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Trip B/
Outside Temperature’’ to ‘‘Engine
Oil Life’’, and then back to the ‘‘Trip
A/Odometer’’ as shown in the next
column.
You can also change the display by
pushing the select/reset knob in the
instrument panel.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, what you last
selected is displayed.
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
Multi-Information Display
Odometer
Instruments and Controls
85
Press the
SEL/RESET
button
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１５：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In the left corner of the lower
segment, a compass indicates which
direction your vehicle is pointed.
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
You can customize the Trip A and
AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition
on the multi-information display (see
page ).
When you reset Trip A, AVERAGE
FUEL A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, AVERAGE
FUEL B is reset.
To reset a trip meter, display it, then
press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
While a trip meter is displayed, you
can change the display between
‘‘Trip A’’ and ‘‘Trip B’’ by pressing
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel, or the select/reset
knob in the instrument panel.
112
407
Multi-Information Display
Compass Maintenance MinderTrip Meter
86
COMPASS
ENGINE OIL LIFE
MAINTENANCE
SERVICE ITEM (S)
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１５：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
You can adjust the outside
temperature on the multi-
information display (see page ).
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example, the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
Here is a list of messages shown on
the multi-information display:
This shows the outside temperature
in Fahrenheit (U.S. models), or in
Centigrade (Canadian models).
110
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Outside Temperature Display System Messages
Instruments and Controls
87
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１５：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
See page
11, 91
See page
21, 91
See page
97
See page
34, 98
See page
94, 353
See page
91, 473
See page
93, 473
See page
97, 473
See page
95, 392
See page
94, 391
See page
100, 454
See page
96, 471
See page
96, 471
See page
97, 472
Multi-Information Display
88
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
Canada
U.S.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１６：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
CONTINUED
: Canadian model only
See page
35, 94 See page
93
See page
92
See page
93
See page
92
See page
98, 384
See page
96, 386
See page
99, 138
See page
99, 160
See page
99, 166
See page
98, 354
See page
95, 409
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
89
Canada
Canada
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
U.S.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１６：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
Most of the messages are displayed
for about 5 seconds, and then the
normal display returns. If there are
several system messages to be
shown, the display switches these
messages every 5 seconds.
To cancel the message(s) before 5
seconds elapsed, press the INFO
button on the steering wheel.
Even if you press the INFO button,
some messages stay on or come on
again at regular intervals until the
problem is corrected:
FASTEN SEAT BELT
FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT
BELT
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: APPROACHING
OBJECT
PAX SYSTEM WARNING
You can see the message(s) again by
pressing the INFO button repeatedly
if the system message indicator
remains lit on the instrument panel.
(Models with PAX system)
Multi-Information Display
90
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１６：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you start driving without releasing
the parking brake, the multi-
information display interrupts the
current display and shows
‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE.’’
This message continues, and a
chime sounds, until you release the
parking brake, or the vehicle speed
slows down to less than 0.5 mph (0.8
km/h).
If the tailgate or any door(s) is not
closed tightly, the display reminds
you to close the tailgate or the
door(s) before you start driving.
This display continues until you
close the door(s) or the tailgate.
Pressing the INFO button on the
steering wheel momentarily changes
the display to the normal display, but
it will come back after 5 seconds.
In addition to the seat belt reminder
indicator on the instrument panel,
the multi-information display
interrupts the current display and
shows ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ or
‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT
BELT’’ifyouoryourfront
passenger do not fasten your seat
belts while driving. This message
remains displayed if you ignore it
and do not wear your seat belts while
the vehicle is moving.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Fasten Seat Belt Door and Tailgate Open Release Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
91
Canada
U.S.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１６：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door, you will see
‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ on the display and
hear a reminder beeper.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go off after several days of
normal driving once you tighten or
replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .472
Multi-Information Display
Remove Key Tighten Fuel Cap
92
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１６：４４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the brake fluid level is at or below
theMINmarkonthesideofthe
brake fluid reservoir in the engine
compartment, you will see ‘‘BRAKE
FLUID LOW.’’ If you see this
message, have the brake system
checked by your dealer (see page
).
If the fluid level in the windshield
washer reservoir gets low, you will
see ‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ on the
multi-information display.
If the level of the fuel in the tank
gets low, you will see ‘‘FUEL LOW’’
on the multi-information display, and
you must refuel soon. The low fuel
indicator on the instrument panel will
also come on.
473
CONTINUED
On Canadian model only
Multi-Information Display
Brake Fluid Low Fuel Low Washer Fluid Low
Instruments and Controls
93
U.S.
Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１６：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This message, and the indicator to
the left of the message, is part of the
parking sensor system. If you are
approaching too close to an object,
you will see ‘‘WARNING:
APPROACHING OBJECT’’ on the
display and hear a beeper. See page
for more information.
If the passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off, you will see
‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’
on the multi-information display. See
page for more information.
If one or more of your vehicle tires
are low on pressure, you will see a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message on the display. See page
for more information on the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS).
35
353
391
Multi-Information Display
Passenger Side Airbag Off Check Tire Pressure Warning: Approaching Object
94
U.S.
Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１７：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ００９９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
When the engine oil life reaches 15%,
the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE
SOON’’ and the code for the
maintenance items to be performed.
When the engine oil life reaches 5%,
the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUE
NOW’’ along with the same
maintenance items.
If there is a problem in the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
you will see ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information
display. If you see this message, the
TPMS is not monitoring tire
pressures. Have the TPMS checked
by your dealer as soon as possible
(see page ).
Have your dealer do the indicated
maintenance as soon as you see this
message, and have them reset the
display after completing the service.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance or do not reset the
display, the message changes to
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when the
engine oil life becomes 0%.
These messages appear on the multi-
information display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
For details on engine oil life and
maintenance messages, refer to page
.
Also refer to page for important
maintenance safety precautions.
409
406
395
Multi-Information Display
Maintenance Messages Check TPMS System
Instruments and Controls
95
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１７：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１００
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see ‘‘CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information
display, it means the battery is not
being charged. See page for
more information.
If the engine oil is very low or has
lost pressure, you will see ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ on the multi-
information display. You will also see
the low oil pressure indicator in the
instrument panel flashing or staying
on. If you see this message, you
should take immediate action since
serious engine damage is possible.
Follow the procedure on page .
If there is a problem with the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system, you
will see ‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ on
the multi-information display. If you
see this message, have the VSA
system checked by your dealer (see
page ).386
471
471
Multi-Information Display
Check Charging SystemCheck Engine Oil LevelCheck VSA System
96
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１７：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
If there is a problem with the
automatic transmission, you will see
‘‘CHECK TRANSMISSION’’ on the
multi-information display. Avoid
rapid acceleration, and have the
transmission checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
If there is a problem with the brake
system, you will see ‘‘CHECK
BRAKE SYSTEM’’ on the multi-
information display. The parking
brake and brake system indicator in
the instrument panel will also come
on. See page for more
information.
If you see ‘‘CHECK EMISSION
SYSTEM’’ on the multi-information
display, it means one of the engine’s
emission systems may have a
problem. Have your vehicle checked
by your dealer (see page ).
473
472
Multi-Information Display
Check TransmissionCheck Brake SystemCheck Emission System
Instruments and Controls
97
U.S.
Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１７：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If there is a problem with the
parking sensor system, the multi-
information display shows a
‘‘CHECK PARKING SENSOR
SYSTEM’’ message. See page
for more information.
If there is a problem in the anti-lock
brake system (ABS), you will see
‘‘CHECKABSSYSTEM’’onthe
multi-information display. If you see
this message, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer (see page ).
If there is a problem with your front
airbags, side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
automatic seat belt tensioners, side
curtain airbags, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors, you will see
‘‘CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ on the
multi-information display. Take your
vehicle to a dealer as soon as
possible(seepage ).34
384 354
Multi-Information Display
Check Parking Sensor SystemCheck Airbag SystemCheck ABS System
98
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１７：３６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If there is a problem with the power
tailgate, the display shows ‘‘CHECK
POWER TAILGATE.’’ See page
for more information.
If there is a problem with either
power sliding door, the multi-
information display shows ‘‘CHECK
LEFT SLIDING DOOR’’ or ‘‘CHECK
RIGHT SLIDING DOOR.’’ See page
for more information.
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display, there is a
problem in the high beam headlight’s
circuit. Take your vehicle to a dealer
to have it checked.166
158
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Check DRL SystemCheck Power TailgateCheck Left/Right Sliding Door
Instruments and Controls
99
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１７：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Michelin PAX system. The PAX
system uses the multi-information
display to show you one of three
messages while you are driving with
a flat tire.
For more information, see page .454
U.S. models (If equipped)
Multi-Information Display
PAX Warning Messages
100
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１７：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
With the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, press and hold the
INFO button for more than 3
seconds. ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY’’
appears on the multi-information
display.
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure you use your transmitter
to unlock the driver’s door.
If you use the key to unlock the
driver’s door, the system cannot
recognize either ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or
‘‘DRIVER 2.’’ In this case, when you
try to enter the customizing mode,
‘‘DRIVER UNKNOWN
CUSTOMIZE IMPOSSIBLE’’ will be
displayed, and you cannot customize
the settings.
Refer to the table on the following
pages about the settings you want to
customize.
UsetheINFObuttononthesteering
wheel to see the settings, and the
SEL/RESET button to enter your
selections.
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL,’’ as
described on page .
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select ‘‘CHANGE
SETTING,’’ and follow the
instructions on page .
The first customizing menu is:
CHANGE SETTING
DEFAULT ALL
You cannot customize the settings
under these conditions:
If you turn the ignition switch to
the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
(0) position.
If you move the shift lever out of
Park.
You can cancel each custom setting
(Driver 1, Driver 2). Press and hold
the LOCK and SLIDING DOOR
button (passenger’s side) at the
same time until the LED in the
remote transmitter will blink twice.
At this time, the custom setting is
changed to the default setting. To
activate each custom setting (Driver
1, Driver 2), repeat this procedure.
The LED will blink for 1 second to
indicate the custom setting has been
activated.
106
104
CONTINUED
Customized Settings
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
101
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：０４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−〜± 〜
−〜± 〜
＊
Menu Item
LANGUAGE
SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET WITH
REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME
RESET
MEMORY POSITION
LINK
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER
Description
Changes the language used in the display.
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy to
reset when you refuel.
Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.
Changes the driver’s seat to a stored setting.
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
Setting Option
ENGLISH
FRENCH
SPANISH
5F° 0°F 5F° (U.S.)
3C° 0°C 3C°
(Canada)
ON
OFF
IGN RESET
TRIP A RESET
TRIP B RESET
ON
OFF
15 sec
30 sec
60 sec
0sec
15 sec
30 sec
60 sec
Page
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
Group Setup
METER SETUP
(P. 107)
POSITION SETUP
(P. 116)
LIGHTING
SETUP
(P. 118)
Default setting:
Multi-Information Display
102
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Menu Item
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEYLESS LOCK
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
FRONT WIPER
ACTION
Setting Option
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEHICLE SPEED
OFF
DRIVER’S DOOR WITH
SHIFT TO P
ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT
TO P
DRIVER’S DOOR WITH
IGN OFF
ALL DOORS WITH IGN
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
WITH VEH SPD
INTERMITTENT
OK
CANCEL
Page
123
125
127
129
131
104
Group Setup
DOOR · WINDOW
SETUP
(P. 122)
WIPER SETUP
(P. 131)
DEFAULT ALL
Description
Changes when the doors automatically lock.
Changes when the doors automatically unlock.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also sound
when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doors
to relock and the security system to set after you
unlock and do not open the door.
Changes the wiper operation between two settings
when the wiper switch is in the INT position.
Changes all the customized settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory.
Default setting:
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
103
０７／１１／１５ ０８：５４：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To enter the customizing mode,
press and hold the INFO button for
more than 3 seconds. Then select
‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ by pressing the
INFO button.
To set the default settings, select
‘‘OK’’ by pressing the INFO button,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
When ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is
completed successfully, you will see
the above display for several seconds,
and the display will return to
‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.’’
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’
DEFAULT ALL
Multi-Information Display
104
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１０９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ is not completed
successfully, you will see the above
display for several seconds, then the
display goes back to the normal
message mode. Repeat the
procedure to select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL.’’
If you want to cancel ‘‘DEFAULT
ALL,’’ select ‘‘CANCEL,’’ then press
the SEL/RESET button. The display
goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.’’
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
105
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：２６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
While the multi-information display
is showing ‘‘CHANGE SETTING,’’
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display will change to the initial
display of CUSTOMIZE GROUP.
Then, each time you press the INFO
button, the display changes as shown
in the next column.
Press the INFO button until you see
the setup you want to customize, and
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.
DOOR · WINDOW SETUP (see
page )
METER SETUP (see page )
POSITION SETUP (see page
)
LIGHTING SETUP (see page
)
WIPER SETUP (see page )
107
116
118
122
131
Change Setting
Multi-Information Display
106
Press the SEL/RESET button
Press the INFO button
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There are four custom settings items
in the Meter Setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION (see
page )
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY (see page )
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL
(see page )
ELAPSED TIME RESET (see
page )
While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is displayed,
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then, press the
INFO button repeatedly. Each time
you press the INFO button, the
display changes as shown.
To customize a setting, press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
the setting, and press the SEL/
RESET button. Then, follow the
procedures described on the
following pages.
108
110
112
114
CONTINUED
Meter Setup
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
107
Press the INFO button
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：４４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
While the multi-information display
is showing ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. The display changes
to ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION.’’
Press the SEL/RESET button again
to enter the language selection mode.
There are three selectable languages,
English, French, and Spanish. Each
time you press the INFO button, the
display changes as shown.
Select the language you want by
pressing the INFO button, and press
the SEL/RESET button to enter
your selection.
Language Selection
Multi-Information Display
108
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When language selection is
successfully completed, the display
changes to the screen shown above
for several seconds, then goes back
to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
If you fail to select a language
properly, you will see the above
display for several seconds, then the
display goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
MENU.’’ Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION,’’
press the INFO button repeatedly
until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the
SEL/RESET button. The display
goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
All messages on the multi-
information display will be shown in
the language you selected.
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
109
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１８：５８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
The highlighted number is the
current adjustment above or below
the outside temperature. Press the
INFO button repeatedly until the
appropriate number appears, then
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.
If you find that the temperature
reading is always a few degrees
below or above the actual
temperature, adjust it as described
on the following columns.
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘METER SETUP,’’ press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel. The display changes to the
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the
INFO button once, and you will see
‘‘ADJ. OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY’’
as shown above.
Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
110
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you fail to enter the desired
adjustment properly, you will see the
above display for several seconds,
then the display goes back to
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat the
adjustment.
When your selection is successfully
entered, you will see the above
display for several seconds, and then
the display changes back to
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
To exit ‘‘ADJ. OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY,’’ press the INFO button
until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press the
SEL/RESET button. The display
goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
111
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To cause ‘‘Trip meter A’’ and
‘‘Average Fuel Economy’’ to reset
every time you refuel your vehicle,
adjust it as described on the
following pages.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
The lower segment changes
between ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’ each time
you press the INFO button. Enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ of the
‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP,’’ press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel. The display changes to
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
‘‘TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL.’’ in
the lower segment as shown above.
Multi-Information Display
Trip A Reset with Refuel
112
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When your selection is successfully
entered, you will see the above
display for several seconds, and then
the display goes back to
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, then the display
goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘TRIP A RESET WITH
REFUEL,’’ press the INFO button
until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ and press the
SEL/RESET button. The display
goes back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
CONTINUED
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
113
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：２２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘METER SETUP’’ of the
‘‘CUSTOMIZE GROUP,’’ press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel. The display changes to
‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ in the
lower segment as shown above.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Press the INFO button repeatedly
until the desired condition appears,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Therearethreepossiblesettings:
IGN RESET: The elapsed time
resets each time the ignition switch
is turned to the ON (II) position.
TRIP A RESET: The elapsed time
resets each time the TRIP A is reset.
TRIP B RESET: The elapsed time
resets each time the TRIP B is reset.
Elapsed Time Reset
Multi-Information Display
114
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１１９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET,’’
press the INFO button until you see
‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET
button.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and the display goes back
to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
115
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘POSITION SETUP,’’ press
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. The display changes
to ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ as
shown above.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the INFO button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is
‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors move to the positions stored
in the memory when you open the
driver’s door, using the remote
transmitter.
Refer to page for setting the seat
position memory. Also refer to page
forremotetransmitteruse.
184
149
Position Setup
Memory Position Setup
Multi-Information Display
116
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：４４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘MEMORY POSITION
LINK,’’ press the INFO button until
you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/
RESET button.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, then the display goes back
to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
117
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There are two custom settings in the
Lighting Setup:
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Each time you press the INFO
button, the highlighted number
changes from ‘‘15 sec,’’ to ‘‘30 sec,’’
andthento‘‘60sec.’’Tomakeyour
selection, press the SEL/RESET
button.
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors. You can change the
time that the interior lights fade out.
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ press
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. The display changes
to ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ as shown above.
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME (see next
column)
While the ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
displayed, press the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel. Each
time you press the INFO button, the
display changes between
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER.’’ To make your
selection, press the SEL/RESET
button.
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
(see page )120
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Multi-Information Display
118
０７／０９／０３ ２０：１９：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME,’’ press the INFO
button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then
press the SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
119
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The headlights, parking lights,
taillights, and license plate light turn
off after the selected time when you
remove the key from the ignition
switch and close the driver’s door.
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP,’’ press
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then press the
INFO button to display
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’
as shown above.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Each time you press the INFO
button, the highlighted number
changes from ‘‘0 sec,’’ to ‘‘15 sec,’’ to
‘‘30 sec,’’ and then to ‘‘60 sec.’’
Press the INFO button repeatedly
until the desired time appears, then
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Multi-Information Display
120
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’ Repeat
the setup.
To exit ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF
TIMER,’’ press the INFO button
until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the
SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
121
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To customize a setting, press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
the setting you want to customize,
and press the SEL/RESET button.
Then follow the procedures
described on the following pages.
AUTO DOOR LOCK (see page
)
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER (see
page )
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT (see
page )
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK (see
page )
There are three custom settings in
the Door · Window Setup:
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW SETUP,’’
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Each time you press
the INFO button, the display
changesasshowninthenext
column.
123
125
127
129
Door · Window Setup
Multi-Information Display
122
Press the INFO
button
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
There are three settings you can
choose from:
OFF
The auto door lock is deactivated all
the time.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Press the INFO button repeatedly
until the desired condition appears,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
SHIFT FROM P
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
VEHICLE SPEED The doors lock
when the vehicle speed reaches 9
mph (15 km/h).
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘DOOR · WINDOW SETUP’’
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. The display changes
to ‘‘AUTO DOOR LOCK’’ as shown
above.
CONTINUED
Auto Door Lock
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
123
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘AUTO DOOR LOCK,’’
press the INFO button until you see
‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET
button.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Multi-Information Display
124
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１２９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
− While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then press the
INFO button once. The display
changes to ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ as shown above.
There are three settings you can
choose from:
SHIFT TO P The driver’s door or
all the doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to Park.
IGN OFF The driver’s door or all
the doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
OFF The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Press the INFO button repeatedly
until the desired condition appears,
and press the SEL/RESET button to
enter your selection.
CONTINUED
Auto Door Unlock
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
125
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘AUTO DOOR UNLOCK,’’
press the INFO button until you see
‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET
button.
Multi-Information Display
126
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２０：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Each time you press the INFO
button, the display changes to ‘‘ON,’’
to ‘‘OFF,’’ then to ‘‘EXIT.’’
Select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the INFO button, and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
When you press the UNLOCK
button on the remote transmitter to
unlock the doors and the tailgate, the
exterior lights blink twice to verify
that the doors and the tailgate are
unlocked and the security system is
turned off.
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
arelockedandthesecuritysystem
has set (see page ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ as shown
above.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
318
CONTINUED
Keyless Lock Acknowledgement
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
127
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：０４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display
changes to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT,’’ press the
INFO button until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’
then press the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display
128
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
thetailgatewithin30seconds,the
doors and the tailgate automatically
relock and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
While the multi-information display
shows ‘‘DOOR·WINDOW SETUP,’’
press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel. Then press the
INFO button repeatedly until you see
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ as
shown above.
Press the SEL/RESET button, then
press the INFO button.
Select the desired relock time by
pressing the INFO button, and enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
Security Relock Timer
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
129
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
To exit ‘‘SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER,’’ press the INFO button
until you see ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the
SEL/RESET button.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Multi-Information Display
130
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：２３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
With ‘‘WIPER SETUP’’ shown on the
multi-information display, press the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel. The display changes to
‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION’’ as
shown above.
You can select from these two
settings when the wiper switch is in
the INT (intermittent) position:
WITH VEH SPD The intermittent
operation varies according to vehicle
speed.
INTERMITTENT The
intermittent operation varies
according to the selection you make
on the wiper lever’s intermittent
control ring.
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Press the INFO button to select
‘‘WITH VEH SPD’’ or
‘‘INTERMITTENT,’’ and enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
Wiper Setup
Front Wiper Action
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
131
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To exit ‘‘FRONT WIPER ACTION,’’
press the INFO button until you see
‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET
button.
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
Multi-Information Display
132
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1:
2:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
133
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
PARKING SENSOR
SYSTEM SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
POWER SLIDING DOOR
SWITCH
MOONROOF SWITCH
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROL BUTTONS
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
SWITCH
PEDAL POSITION
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
(P.82)
(P.35)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) OFF
SWITCH
NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
BUTTONS
HORN
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS
CLOCK
AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR
ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS
(P.193)
(P.162)
(P.189)
(P.282)
(P.158)/
(P.387)
(P.352)
(P.387)
BLUETOOTH
HANDSFREELINK
BUTTONS
(P.326) (P.141)
(P.135, 138)
(P.134)
(P.135)
(P.319)
(P.281)
(P.140)
(P.221, 285)
(P.205)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
(P.140)
2
1
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
You can customize some windshield
wiper settings. See page for
more information.
The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay ( position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
131
On Touring models
MIST
OFF
LO
HI
Windshield Washer
INT
Windshield Wipers and Washers
134
ADJUSTMENT RING
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２１：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１３９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
To turn on the rear window wiper,
rotate the switch clockwise to ON.
It operates intermittently.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and indicator lights
AUTO (Touring models only)
Headlights on
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Fog lights off (Touring models
only)
Fog lights on (Touring models
only)
OFF
Hold past ON to turn the window
wiper on and the window washer
on.
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wipers activated, the rear
window wiper operates automatically.
When the wiper control lever is
positioned as follows:
The rear window wiper
operates intermittently.
The rear window wiper
operates continuously.
Rotate the switch
counterclockwise to spray the
window washer.
7.
8.
9.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn Signal and HeadlightsRear Window Wiper and Washer
INT
LO or HI
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
Instruments and Controls
135
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２２：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
The rotating switch
on the left lever controls the lights.
Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the parking lights,
taillights, instrument panel lights,
side-marker lights, and rear license
plate lights.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The high beam indicator will come
on (see page ). Pull it back to
return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beams will stay on as long as you
hold the lever back.
73
Turn Signal Headlights
High Beams
Turn Signal, Headlights
136
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２２：１３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights, all
other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on the automatic lighting,
turn the light switch to AUTO at any
time. The lights will come on
automatically when the outside light
level becomes low (at dusk, for
example). The lights on indicator
comesonasareminder.Thelights
and indicator turn off automatically
when the system senses high
ambient light.
The lights turn off automatically
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position. To turn them
on again, either turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, or
turn the light switch to position.
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
thatyouturnonthelightsmanually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities. The automatic lighting feature is
controlledbyasensorlocatedontop
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
On Touring models
AUTO
Headlights
Instruments and Controls
137
SENSOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２２：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.
The lights turn on again when you
unlock or open the driver’s door.
On the Touring models, this time is
changeable. See page for how to
select and set the time.
This turns off the headlights,
parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate lights, and
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds of removing the key from
the ignition switch and closing the
driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the or
position, remove the key, then
open and close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights turn off after
10 minutes.
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
They will go off when the headlights
are turned off.
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
118
On EX, EX-L and Touring models onlyOn Touring models
Automatic Lighting Off FeatureFog Lights
Daytime Running Lights
Headlights
138
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２２：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The select/reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
Separate adjustments can be made
when the headlights are on and off.
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by
turning the knob a click to the left.
The level of brightness is shown on
the multi-information display
(Touring models) or on the
information display (LX, EX, EX-L
and Canadian DX models) while you
adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds after
you finish adjusting.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or . Turning the select/
reset knob to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
139
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
Touring model is shown
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０７／１１／０８ １８：４９：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It shuts off when you
turn off the ignition. You have to
turn the defogger on again when you
restart the vehicle.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all outside turn signals and
both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
140
EX, EX-L and Touring modelsLX and Canadian DX models
０７／１１／０８ １８：４９：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel so it
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
141
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２２：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the door
locks. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle
and the valet key at a parking facility.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks. The keys without a remote
transmitter do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
Keys and Locks
142
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER KEYS
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET KEY
(Gray)
VALET KEY
(Gray)
MASTER
KEYS
(Black)
EX, EX-L and Touring models LX and Canadian DX models
０７／１１／０８ １８：４９：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
143
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２３：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
−
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0)
position, the shift lever must be in
Park, and you must push the key in
slightly.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).89
On Touring models
START (III)LOCK (0)
ON (II)
ACCESSORY (I)
Ignition Switch
144
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２３：１５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１４９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Press it
twice to unlock the other doors and
the tailgate. Some exterior lights will
flash twice each time you press the
button. If you do not open any door
orthetailgatewithin30seconds,
they will automatically relock.
Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the security system has
set. You cannot lock the doors and
thetailgateifanydoororthetailgate
is not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights, depending on their
switch positions, will come on (see
page ). If you do not open any
door, the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then go out. If you relock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
205
On LX and Canadian DX models
UNLOCK PANIC
LOCK
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
145
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
０７／１１／０８ １８：５５：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
Remote Transmitter
146
SCREW
BATTERY
TAB
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２３：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−−
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Press it
twice to unlock the other doors and
the tailgate. Some exterior lights will
flash twice each time you press the
button.
If you do not open any doors or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
If you press the LOCK button and
the PASSENGER’S SIDE SLIDING
DOOR button at the same time for
about 1 second, the LED in the
remote transmitter will blink twice,
and all doors and the tailgate will
unlock simultaneously when you
press the UNLOCK button. To
cancel this feature, press the LOCK
button and the PASSENGER’S SIDE
SLIDING DOOR button at the same
time. The LED will blink once.
On Touring models, you can change
this setting (see page ).
Press and hold this
button for about 1 second to attract
attention; the horn will sound, and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
mode does not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the security system has
set. You cannot lock the doors and
thetailgateifanydoororthetailgate
is not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights, depending on their
switch positions, will come on (see
page ). If you do not open any
door, the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then go out. If you relock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
129
205
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
UNLOCK
PANICLOCK
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
147
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
Touring model is shown.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２３：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the power sliding door MAIN
switch on the dashboard is in the
OFF position, you cannot open or
close the sliding doors with the
remote transmitter.
You can open or close the power
tailgate with the remote transmitter
when the doors are unlocked. Press
andholdtheTAILGATEbuttonto
open or close the power tailgate.
When the tailgate begins to move,
you will hear a beep, and some front
and rear lights will flash.
You can open or close each sliding
door with the remote transmitter
when the doors are unlocked. Push
andholdtherightbuttontoopenor
close the passenger’s side door, and
the left button to open or close the
driver’s side door.
On Touring models only
Opening or Closing the Power
Sliding Doors
Opening or Closing the Power
Tailgate
Remote Transmitter
148
POWER SLIDING DOOR
MAIN SWITCH
TAILGATE
BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE SLIDING
DOOR BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
SLIDING DOOR BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２３：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Each remote transmitter activates
the driver’s seat position memory
system (see page ) and
customized vehicle control settings
(see page ). When you open the
driver’s door after unlocking it with
the remote transmitter, the driver’s
seat and outside mirrors move to the
positions stored in memory. You will
hear two beeps when the movement
is completed.
You can turn off this system
activation with the remote
transmitter. Press and hold the
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the
same time. The LED in the remote
transmitter will blink twice. Then
release the buttons, and press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button.
The driving position memory
activation (Driver 1, Driver 2) is
shownonthebackofeach
transmitter. Make sure you store
your seat and outside mirror
positions in the memory that is
activated by the transmitter you
normally carry.
To turn the keyless memory settings
back on, repeat this procedure. The
LED will come on for 1 second to
indicate the feature has been turned
on.
101
184
On Touring models only
Recalling a Memorized Seat
Position
Remote Transmitter Care
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
149
With Driver 2
With Driver 1
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２３：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR2025
To replace the battery, separate the
halfs by carefully prying on the edge
with a coin. Remove the old battery,
and insert a new battery with the
side facing up. Snap the two halves
of the transmitter case back together.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Remote Transmitter
150
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２４：０２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To lock the doors and the tailgate,
press the front of the master door
lock switch on either front door,
pressthelocktabonthedriver’s
door, or use the outside lock on the
driver’s door.
Pressing the rear of the master door
lock switch will unlock all doors and
the tailgate.
The lock tab on any door locks and
unlocks that door.
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door lock. To
unlock only the driver’s door, insert
the key, turn the key, and release it.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the driver’s door is
closed. Pushing the front of the
master door lock switch on the open
passenger’s door will lock all doors
and the tailgate.
Power Door Locks
Lockout Prevention
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
151
Lock
Front
Rear
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２４：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and tailgate to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and apply
the parking brake. Make all settings
before you start driving.
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page .
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page .
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
Thedoorsandthetailgatelock
whenever you move the shift lever
out of the Park (P) position.
Thedoorsandthetailgatelock
when the vehicle speed reaches
9mph(15km/h).
This is the default setting.
1.
2.
123
125
On Touring models
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
Door Locks
152
０７／１１／０８ １８：５５：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
shift lever is moved out of the Park (P)
position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position. 4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
To program the Park Lock mode:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
153
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２４：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
vehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph
(15 km/h).
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position.
This is the default setting.
All doors and tailgate unlock when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
3.
4.
1.
2.
5.
6.
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Auto Door Unlocking
Door Locks
154
０７／１１／０８ １８：５５：４８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１５９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the shift lever is
moved into the Park (P) position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
To program the Park Unlock mode:To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
155
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２４：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the ignition switch is
moved out of the ON (II) position.
all doors and tailgate
unlock feature
driver’s door unlock
feature.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of P.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold down the switch:
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate
.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate
4.
5.1.
2.
3.
6.
3.
4.
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Door Locks
156
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２５：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
With the childproof door locks on,
automatic operation with the inside
door handle is disabled.
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up. To close the tailgate, use
the inner handle to pull it down, then
press down on the back edge.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
on page
.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear sliding doors. Each door has
a lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up and use the outside door
handle. 60
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Childproof Door Locks Tailgate
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Door Locks, Tailgate
Instruments and Controls
157
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２５：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The tailgate can be opened and
closed with the remote transmitter
or the switch on the dashboard when
both front doors are unlocked.
The tailgate can also be closed by
pressing the button on the tailgate. If
you press the button again while the
tailgate is closing, you will hear three
beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened position.
Press and hold the tailgate button on
the remote transmitter or the
dashboard switch for about 1 second
to open or close the tailgate. Each
time you press the button on the
remote transmitter or the dashboard
switch, you will hear a beep, and
some front and rear lights will flash.
To open or close the tailgate
manually, see page .
If you push the same button or
switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened or closed position.
160
On Touring models only
Power Tailgate
Tailgate
158
TAILGATE SWITCH
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
TAILGATE BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２５：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The power tailgate has an auto-
reverse feature. If it meets
resistance while opening or closing,
it will beep three times and reverse
direction. However, the tailgate may
not reverse immediately. Always
make sure passengers and objects
are clear of the tailgate before
opening or closing it.
Also check that passengers,
especially children, do not have their
hands on the edge of the tailgate or
on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse
featurestopsworkingwhenthe
tailgate is about to latch so the motor
can pull the tailgate shut.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully
open, the power tailgate needs to be
reset. After connecting the battery
or installing the fuse, close the
tailgate fully by hand.
The power tailgate may not open or
close under the these conditions:
Whenthetailgateortheroofis
covered with snow or ice.
Do not install any accessories on the
tailgate. It may cause the tailgate not
to function properly. If there is snow
or ice on the tailgate, make sure to
remove it before you operate the
tailgate.
If you pull the tailgate release handle
while the tailgate is opening or
closing, it will stop moving. You need
to open or close it the rest of the way
manually.
The tailgate has sensors on both
sides. Be careful not to damage them.
If the sensors are damaged, the
power tailgate does not function
properly.
When the vehicle is swayed in a
strong wind.
The vehicle is parked on a steep
hill.
CONTINUED
Auto-Reverse
Tailgate
Instruments and Controls
159
Closing a power tailgate while
anyone is in the path of the
tailgate can cause serious
injury.
Make sure everyone is clear
before closing the power
tailgate.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２５：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you try to drive off with the
tailgate not closed completely, a
beeper sounds and a ‘‘DOOR &
TAILGATE OPEN’’ message is
shown on the multi-information
display.
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
on page
.
If there is a problem in the power
tailgate system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’
message on the multi-information
display. Have the system checked by
your dealer.
With this message shown on the
multi-information display, you can
still open or close the tailgate
manually.
Push the release lever to the right as
shown.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate.
60
On Touring models
Unlocking the Tailgate
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Tailgate
160
LEVER
COVER
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２５：３８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To open, pull the inside or outside
door handle, and slide the door back.
It will latch in the fully open position.
When opening from the inside, the
childproof door lock must be
unlocked.
To close, pull either handle, and slide
the door closed. Make sure the door
is closed and latched securely before
driving, and all passengers are clear
of the sliding doors before closing
them.
The doors are electrically powered
and can be operated with the remote
transmitter, the door handles, or the
dashboard switches. To operate the
doors:
When opening a sliding door, it stops
about halfway if the window is open
morethan3in(8cm).Ifthevehicle
is facing downhill, the sliding door
will slam shut when you release the
door handle. Always close the
window fully before opening the
sliding door.
The shift lever must be in Park or
neutral. To operate the doors with
the shift lever in neutral, the
ignition switch must be in the ON
(II) position with the brake pedal
pressed or the parking brake
applied.
TheMAINswitchmustbeinthe
ON position.
The doors must be unlocked.
Usethekeytounlockthetailgateas
shown, then pull the outer handle to
open the tailgate.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
CONTINUED
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
On LX and Canadian DX models
Power Sliding DoorsOpening and Closing Manual
Sliding Doors
Tailgate, Sliding Doors
Instruments and Controls
161
Unlock
Lock
０７／１１／０８ １８：５６：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When the shift lever is in Park:
When the shift lever is in neutral and
the ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position:
If you shift out of Park while a door
is closing, you will hear a beep until
the door closes.
When you shift out of Park while a
door is opening, you will hear a
continuous tone and the door will
stop moving if you release the brake
pedal or the parking brake. Stop the
vehicle and close the door.
To open the door with the inside
door handle, pull the handle
backward. Push it forward to close
the door. If you pull backward or
push forward on the door handle
while a door is opening or closing,
the door stops moving. Pull
backward or push forward to open or
close the door fully.
To open or close the door with the
outside door handle, pull the door
handle. If you pull the door handle
while a door is opening or closing,
the door stops moving. If you pull the
door handle again, the door will open
fully.
The dashboard switches to the left
of the steering column allow you to
open or close the power sliding doors.
The MAIN switch on the dashboard
controls power to the sliding doors.
If you shift out of neutral or release
the brake pedal or the parking brake
while a door is opening, you will hear
a continuous tone and the door will
stop moving. Stop the vehicle and
close the door.
If you shift out of neutral or release
the brake pedal or the parking brake
while a door is closing, you will hear
a beep until the door closes.
Door Handles Dashboard Switches
Sliding Doors
162
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES
MAIN SWITCH
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２５：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To open a power sliding door, push
and release the bottom of the
appropriate switch. If you forget to
unlock the door, you will hear three
beeps. Unlock the door, and try
again.
To open and close a power sliding
door, press and hold the appropriate
button for at least 1 second. If you
forget to unlock the door, you will
hear three beeps. Unlock the door,
and try again.
Each power sliding door has an auto-
reverse feature. If a door meets
resistance while closing, it will beep
three times and reverse direction.
However, the door may not reverse
immediately and may cause some
bruising or discomfort. Always make
sure passengers and objects are
clear of the doors before closing
them.
If a rear window is open more than
3 in (8 cm), the power sliding door is
designed to stop about halfway to
avoid accidents. If this happens,
close the door with the door handles,
the dashboard switch, or the remote
transmitter. Close the window and
open the sliding door. Make sure the
window is fully closed before you
operate the power sliding door.
To stop movement, push the
appropriate door button; you will
hear three beeps. Push and hold the
same button again for at least 1
second and the door will reverse
direction.
When the MAIN switch is in the
OFF position, you have to operate
the doors manually.
To stop a door, push either the top or
bottom of the switch. The door will
stop and you will hear three beeps.
Push the switch again to resume
movement.
To close a sliding door, push and
release the top of the switch.
Remote Transmitter Auto-Reverse
Sliding Doors
Instruments and Controls
163
LED
DRIVER’S SIDE
SLIDING DOOR
BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
SLIDING DOOR BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２６：０６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can manually open or close the
sliding doors. The MAIN switch
must be in the OFF position. To
open a door, pull the inside or
outside door handle, and slide the
door back. It will latch in the fully
open position. To close, pull either
handle and slide the door forward.
When the door is almost closed, the
auto-closer will pull the door shut.
Before operating the sliding doors,
check that passengers, especially
children, do not have their hands on
the edge of the sliding door or on the
door pillar. The auto-reverse motor
stops working when the door is
about to latch so the auto-closer can
pull the door shut.
If there is an obstacle in the door sill,
the power sliding door may not open
or close properly. When removing
the obstacle from the door sill, make
sure to turn off the main switch on
the dashboard.
When replacing a flat tire, make sure
to turn off the power sliding door
main switch on the dashboard.
Do not allow anyone to step on the
lower arm of the sliding door while
the door is open. This could damage
the sliding door mechanism.
Whenyoudrivewithchildreninyour
vehicle, use the childproof door
locks (see page ). This will
prevent children from opening the
doors accidentally.
Do not put any item in the door
pocket that sticks out from the
pocket. It can prevent the doors from
opening or closing properly, and
damage the vehicle body.
157
On all models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Manually Opening/Closing the
Power Sliding Door
Important Sliding Door
Precautions
Sliding Doors
164
Closing a sliding door while any
part of a passenger is in the
door’s path can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all passengers are
clear of the doorway before
closing a sliding door.
０７／０９／１０ １９：３７：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１６９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you release the fuel fill door,
the driver’s side sliding door
automatically locks so it cannot open
and interfere with the fuel door. If a
passenger attempts to unlock the
door by cycling the lock knob several
times, the door can be opened.
If a passenger needs to get out while
you are refueling, instruct that
person to exit on the passenger’s
side.
When you close the fuel fill door, the
driver’s side sliding door unlocks if it
was unlocked when you opened the
fuel fill door.
If you open the fuel fill door while
the driver’s side sliding door is
opening, the sliding door stops. If
this happens, the door must be
operated manually.
When parking facing downhill, make
sure the doors are latched in the
fully open position, and then hold the
door open for your passengers. Do
not pull the inside or outside door
handle, or the door will slam shut.
Make sure the main switch on the
dashboard is in the ON position.
When parking facing downhill on a
steep grade, the power sliding doors
may not open or close as they do
normally.
If you leave the vehicle on a steep
downhill with a power sliding door
half open and the engine off, the
magnetic lock will turn off after 30
minutes and the sliding door will
automatically open or close. In this
case you will hear a continuous tone.
If your vehicle is facing downhill, do
not turn the main switch to OFF
while the door is opening because
thedoormayslamshut.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Refueling Parking on a Hill
Sliding Doors
Instruments and Controls
165
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２６：２３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the battery is disconnected or goes
dead, close the sliding door
completely by hand. If it still does
not operate properly after the
battery is reconnected, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
If there is a problem in the power
sliding door system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK LEFT SLIDING DOOR’’ or
‘‘CHECK RIGHT SLIDING DOOR’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ). If this
message stays on, turn the MAIN
switch to OFF, and have the system
inspected by your dealer.
If the power sliding door indicator
comesonandstayson,thereisa
problem in the system. Turn the
MAIN switch to OFF, and have the
system inspected by a dealer.
Each sliding door has a pinch sensor
on the front edge. Do not damage
this sensor, or the power sliding door
may not operate properly.
89
On EX, EX-L and Touring models On EX and EX-L models
On Touring models
Pinch Sensor Power Sliding Door Indicator
Sliding Doors
166
PINCH SENSOR
POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２６：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There are bucket seats with
armrests for two front passengers,
bucket seats with armrests for two
passengers in the second row, and a
bench seat for three passengers in
the third row.
For greater cargo capacity, the seats
in the second row can be removed,
andthebenchseatinthethirdrow
can be folded into the floor.
Your vehicle has a second row plus-
one seat that can be installed
between the second row bucket
seats when needed. The plus-one
seat can also be used as a second
row center console.
Except U.S. LX and Canadian DX
models
Passenger Seating
Convertible Second Row Bucket
Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
167
０７／１１／０８ １８：５６：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
1312
The EX-L and Touring models have
a power adjustable driver’s seat and
front passenger’s seat. The EX
model has a power adjustable driver’s
seat and manual front passenger’s
seat. LX and DX models have manual
driver’s seat and front passenger’s
seat adjustments.
The third row seats do not adjust
forward and backward.
The seats in the second and third
rows adjust manually.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
To adjust the bucket seats in the
second row, pull up the bar on the
front of the seat bottom.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
To change the seat-back angle of the
bucket seats in the second row, pull
forwardontheleverontheoutside
of the seat-back.
Seat Adjustments Manual Seat Adjustments
Seats
168
０７／１１／０８ １８：５６：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. Pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion to raise
the seat bottom or push the lever
down to lower the seat cushion.
The passenger’s seat has two
switches. One moves the seat
forward and backward, and the other
adjusts the seat-back angle.
The left and right halves of the third
seat-back can be adjusted separately.
To adjust the angle, pull the
adjustment strap on the outside of
each seat-back, move the seat-back
to the desired position, and release
the adjustment strap. Let the seat-
back latch in the new position.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
12 13
On EX-L and Touring modelsOn LX and Canadian DX models
CONTINUED
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Power Seat Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
169
ADJUSTMENT STRAPS
０７／１１／０８ １８：５６：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Moves the seat
forward and
backward. To change the lumbar support, move
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back forward or backward.
Keep moving the lever forward or
backward until you find a suitable
position.
Moves the front of
the seat up or down.
(Driver’s seat only)
Raises or lowers the
seat. (Driver’s seat
only)
Moves the whole
seat up and forward,
or down and
backward. The front
of the seat also tilts
up or down at the
same time. (Driver’s
seat only)
Adjusts the seat-
back angle forward
or backward.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Driver’s Lumbar Support
Seats
170
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Theangleofthearmrestoneach
front seat is adjustable. Pivot the
armrest down, and pull it up to the
desired angle.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
An armrest is located on each of the
frontseatsandoneachsideofthe
second row seats (depending on
models).Pivotitdowntouseit.
When you remove the bucket seats
in the second row, pivot the armrests
up out of the way.
See page for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
On EX-L and Touring models
14
CONTINUED
Armrests
Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
171
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：１３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
The front and rear head restraints
adjust for height. You need both
hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
and push the restraint down.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored.
Removing the Head RestraintAdjusting the Head Restraint
Seats
172
RELEASE
BUTTON
LEG
SEAT BACK
RELEASE
BUTTON
CUSHION
Front and Second row seat Third row seat
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer. Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
Active Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
173
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To get into or out of the third row
seat, walk between the second row
seats.
When the seat on the passenger’s
side is moved to the center, walk
through the passenger’s side to get
into or out of the third row seat.
You need to remove the plus-one
seat (see page ) before you can
make this seat arrangement.
To get into or out of the third row
seat, pull up the release lever on the
shoulder of each second row bucket
seat. The seat-back will tilt forward
and the whole seat will slide forward.
178
Third Row Seat Access
Seats
174
RELEASE LEVER
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：３６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１７９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The second row bucket seat on the
passenger’s side can be moved to the
center to provide access to the third
row seat.
Remove the passenger’s side
second row bucket seat (see page
), then remove the cover.
If you have already set the floor
mat under the passenger’s side
bucket seat, make sure you
remove it before moving the
bucket seat.
Hook the front of the seat to the
floor, then slide the seat toward
the center of the vehicle.
Push the back of the seat down
over the floor hooks. Make sure
the seat is securely locked in place.
1. 2.
3.
177
CONTINUED
Moving the Second Row Bucket
Seat
Seats
Instruments and Controls
175
COVER
HOOK
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：４４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Whentheplus-oneseatisinthe
center position, store the floor mat
under the passenger’s side bucket
seat as shown above.
When the passenger’s side bucket
seat is in the outside position, and
theplus-oneseatisnotused,install
the floor mat and the cover over the
floor anchors.
Make sure the seats are securely
locked in place before driving. A seat
thatisnotlockedinplacecouldfly
around and cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash.
To return the seat to the outside
position, remove the seat, reinstall
the cover, then reinstall the seat.
Seats and Floor Mats
Seats
176
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Both seats can be removed to give
more cargo capacity.
Toinstallthefloormatinanouter
position or the center position, insert
thetabsintotheslitsonthefloor,
then snap the two buttons in place.
Refer to the illustrations above.
Do not remove the seats while
driving.
To remove a second row seat:
Pull up the seat-back angle
adjustment lever, and fold the
seat-back forward.
1.
CONTINUED
Removing the Bucket Seats in the
Second Row
Seats
Instruments and Controls
177
SLITS
Outer position
SLIT
Center position
SEAT-BACK LEVER
TABS
TAB
TABS
BUTTONS
BUTTONS
TAB
LOCK RELEASE LEVER
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２７：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To reinstall the seat, hook the front
of the seat to the floor, then push the
rear of the seat-back until it locks in
place. Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever
under the seat cushion’s front
edge and lifting the rear of the
seat.
Unhook the front of the seat from
the floor by pulling it back slightly,
then pivoting it upward.
Your vehicle has a plus-one seat for
the second row center position.
You can remove the plus-one seat
when it is not used. Do not remove
the seat while driving.
2.
3.
Except U.S. LX and Canadian DX
models
Removing the Second Row
Plus-One Seat
Seats
178
０７／１１／０８ １８：５６：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To remove the plus-one seat: Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever and
lifting the rear of the seat.
Unhook the front of the seat from
the floor by pulling it back slightly,
then pivoting it upward.
Fold the seat-back forward by
pulling the seat-back strap.
Remove the seat cushion by
pulling the seat cushion strap.
Lower the head restraints fully.1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
179
SEAT CUSHION STRAP
SEAT-BACK STRAP
LOCK RELEASE LEVER
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２８：１３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To install the plus-one seat: Install the seat cushion on the seat
bottom plate. To install the cushion,
hook the front of the cushion first,
then push down the rear until the
cushion is securely positioned.
To use the plus-one seat as a center
console, remove its seat cushion by
pulling up the seat cushion strap.
Then pivot the seat-back forward
until it is flat. Store the seat cushion
in the floor storage area.
Make sure the seats are securely
locked in place before driving. A seat
thatisnotlockedinplacecouldfly
around and cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash.
Hook the front of the seat to the
floor, then push down the back until
it locks. Make sure both the front
and back of the seat are securely
latched. Pull up the seat-back, and
adjust the seat-back angle to the
desired position while pulling the
seat-back strap on the outside of the
seat bottom.
Seats
180
SEAT-BACK STRAP
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２８：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To create more cargo space, you can
fold the one-motion third row ‘‘Magic
Seat’’ into the floor recess.
Unlatch the center seat detachable
seat belt anchor, and let the belt
retract all the way into the ceiling.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch into their holding slots. Make
sure both seat belts on the outer
seats are out of the way.
Lower the head restraints fully.
Pull the handle on each seat-back
to unlock the front legs of the
third row seat.
Pivot the seat into the cargo area
floor recess.
Make sure all items in the cargo
area are secured. Loose items can
fly forward and cause injury if you
have to brake hard. See
on page .
3.
4.
1.
2.
370
CONTINUED
Folding the One-Motion Third
Row ‘‘Magic Seat’’
Carrying
Cargo
Seats
Instruments and Controls
181
HANDLES
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２８：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To return the seat to the upright
position:
Pull the seat-back upright with the
strap. Make sure the seat is
securely locked into position
before driving.Pull the seat out of the recess by
pulling on the handle. Pivot the
seat forward all the way. The front
legs of the third row seat will
automatically latch.
1.
2.
Seats
182
STRAPS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２８：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
In LO, the heater does not cycle with
temperature change.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag system.
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use them. The
seat heater switches are located on
the dashboard above the center
pocket. Push the top of the switch,
HI, to rapidly heat up the seat.
After the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
On EX-L and Touring models
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
183
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Passenger’s
seat
Driver’s
seat
HEATERS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２８：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Store a driver’s seat position only
when the vehicle is parked.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new seat position in memory
unless the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position. You can recall a
memorized position with the
ignition switch in any position.
Press and release the MEMO
button on the driver’s door. You
will hear a beep. Then, both
indicators in the memory buttons
will start to blink. Press and hold
one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after you press
the MEMO button. When the
system completes storing a new
driving position, you hear two
beeps. The indicator in the stored
memory button will come on.
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Two seat and outside mirror
positionscanbestoredinseparate
memories. You select a memorized
position by pushing the appropriate
button or using the appropriate
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or
Driver 2).
You can change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting on the
multi-information display (see page
).
This setting can be linked or
unlinked with the remote transmitter.
For more information, see page .
Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page ).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
149
116
170
191
On Touring model only
Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Driving Position Memory System
184
MEMO BUTTON
MEMORY
BUTTONS
INDICATORS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２８：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１８９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Doing any of the following after
pressing the MEMO button will
cancel the storing procedure.
Not pressing a memory button
within 5 seconds.
To select a memorized position, do
this:
Pressing the MEMO button again
within 5 seconds.
Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep.
Readjusting the seat position.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps, and the indicator will
remain on.
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Press any button on the driver’s
door: MEMO, memory button 1 or
2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized positions. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
1.
2.
Selecting a Memorized Position
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
185
MEMORY BUTTONS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２９：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
To open/close the driver’s
window, push the window switch
firmly down or up to the second
detent, and release it. The window
will automatically go up or down all
the way. To stop the window, pull/
push on the window switch briefly.
If the MAIN switch is OFF, the
passenger windows cannot be raised
or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch
offwhenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down to the first detent
andholdit.Releasetheswitchwhen
you want the window to stop. Pull
back on the switch and hold it to
close the window.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
Only on the driver’s window,
the auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the
switch.
AUTO
AUTO REVERSE
Power Windows
186
NOTE:
MAIN SWITCH
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２９：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all
four windows start to open. To
stop the windows, release the
button.
To open the windows further,
pressthebuttonagainandholdit.
If the windows stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
You can open all of the windows
from the outside with the remote
transmitter.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function may be disabled. If
the AUTO function is disabled, the
power window system will need to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Opening the Windows with the
Remote Transmitter
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
187
UNLOCK
BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２９：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. All four windows start to
open. To stop the windows,
release the key.
To close:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windowsstarttoclose.Tostopthe
windows, release the key.
If the windows stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
To open:
You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds of step 2).
To close the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds of step 2).
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Opening/Closing the Windows
with the Key
Power Windows
188
Open
Close
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２９：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
( ). To close the moonroof,
press and hold the top of the switch
( ). To open the moonroof,
press and hold the bottom of the
switch ( ).
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can still open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition. The key-off
delay cancels as soon as you open
either front door. You must then
turn the ignition to the ON (II)
position for the moonroof to operate.
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch
under the left dashboard vent to
operate the moonroof. You must
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position for the moonroof to
operate.
On EX-L and Touring models
Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
189
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２９：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
When you shift to reverse with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, the rear view is shown on
the left side of the inside mirror. For
more information, see page .357
On EX-L and Touring models
On U.S. EX-L without navigation system
and Canadian EX-L models
On LX, EX and Canadian DX models
Mirrors
190
０７／１１／０８ １９：０５：４７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse,
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirrors to their
original position.
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place
the selector switch in the left
position.
To tilt the passenger’s mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
To turn the feature off, place the
switch in the center position.
1.
2.
3.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
191
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH
０７／０９／０３ ２０：２９：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).
69
88
Except U.S. LX model
On Touring models
Heated Mirrors
Parking Brake
Mirrors, Parking Brake
192
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３０：０２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To adjust the pedals: Do not adjust the pedals with your
foot on or under either pedal.
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
Pushandholdthetopofthe
adjustment switch until pedals are
closest to you.
Adjust your seat and the steering
wheel so you can operate the
controls and steering wheel easily.
Pushandholdthebottomofthe
adjustment switch until pedals are
in the position you can press them
fully and comfortably.
You can adjust the position of the
brake pedal and accelerator pedal
when the shift lever is in the Park
position. Push the top of the
adjustment switch to move the
pedals forward, and the bottom to
move them backward.
1.
2.
3.
On Touring models only
Adjustable Driver’s Foot Pedals
Instruments and Controls
193
PEDAL POSITION
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３０：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
Interior Convenience Items
194
VANITY
MIRROR
CENTER
POCKET
SUN VISOR
LOWER
GLOVE BOX
UPPER GLOVE
BOX
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER
: If equipped
COAT HOOKBEVERAGE HOLDERS
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
AC POWER OUTLET
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
IN-FLOOR STORAGE
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３０：１４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０１９９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
To use the retractable center tray,
pull up the outside edge of the tray
until it latches. To store it, pull the
lever and lower the tray.
Sitting on or getting under the tray,
or putting heavy objects on the tray,
may damage or deform it.
Do not keep items on the tray while
driving. They may fall down or fly
around when you go around corners
or brake hard.
CONTINUED
Beverage HoldersRetractable Center Tray
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
195
LEVER
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３０：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２００
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To use the front beverage holder,
pull the handle.
Additional beverage holders for the
frontseatpassengersareinthe
retractable center tray.
The beverage holders for the third
row seat passengers are in the
armrests on the rear side panels.
The plus-one seat has a beverage
holder on the back of the seat-back.
To use the beverage holder, remove
the seat cushion, and fold the seat-
back by pulling the seat-back strap
(see page ).179
Except U.S. LX and Canadian DX
models
Interior Convenience Items
196
０７／１１／０８ １９：０５：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Each rear sliding door has an
integrated sunshade. To use a
sunshade,holdthetabonthetop
and pull the sunshade all the way up.
Insert the holes on the sunshade into
the hooks on the window frame. To
store the shade, unhook it, and let it
retract all the way down.
The sunshades are intended for use
only when the windows are fully
closed. If a window is opened, the
shade can be blown off its hooks. As
the shade automatically retracts, it
could hit and hurt anyone sitting too
close to the window.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
then release the raised detent. It will
unlatch and swing down. To close it,
push it until it latches. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
CONTINUED
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Integrated Sunshades Sunglasses Holder
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
197
HOOK
TAB
Push
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３０：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
To switch back to the sunglasses
holder, close the conversation mirror
and then open the sunglasses holder.
If equipped
Conversation Mirror Sun Visor
Interior Convenience Items
198
SUN VISOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３０：４３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
the mirror. The lights come on when
you open the cover. Make sure you
close the cover when you are not
using the vanity mirror.
The vanity mirror light will not come
on if the sun visor is slid outward.
To open the compartment, pull the
lever and lift the lid. To close, lower
the lid and push it down until it
latches.
You can store items under the seat
cushion of the plus-one seat.
Pull the strap to raise the seat
cushion, store items, then reinstall
the cushion or remove the cushion
and fold the seat-back down to use
the seat as a tray.
Except U.S. LX and Canadian DX
models
Vanity Mirror Rear Compartment Second Row Console
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
199
REAR COMPARTMENT LEVER
STRAP
０７／１１／０８ １９：０６：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There is a large storage area under
the floor between the front seats and
the second row bucket seats.
To place or remove large items from
the storage area, pull off the carpet
near the second row seat, and pull
thehandletoopenthelargelid.
You can store items in the floor
storageareaupto22lbs(10kg).Do
not exceed this weight limit, or you
may damage the floor storage area.
Theinsideofthestorageareacan
get very hot. Do not store any items
that should be kept cool, or items
that can be easily damaged, warped,
or deformed by heat.
Dust, sand, etc., can accumulate in
the floor storage area. If you spill
liquid on the floor around the floor
storage area, it can get inside the
storage area, and the moisture can
be trapped inside. Always keep the
inside of the storage area dry and
clean.
To prevent items from being thrown
about the vehicle and possibly
hurting someone in an accident or
sudden stop, be sure the storage
area lids are securely closed before
driving away.
You can adjust the length of the
hook strap. Pull down the upper
edge of the stopper, and slide it up or
down.
To keep the lid open, attach the hook
to the grab rail on the back of the
front seat-back.
If equipped
In-Floor Storage Area
Interior Convenience Items
200
HANDLE
HOOK
LID
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Open the lower glove box by pulling
the bottom of the handle. Close it
with a firm push. Lock or unlock the
glove box with the master key.
Open the upper glove box by
pressing the button. The lid will
swing open. Close it with a firm push.
Keep the glove boxes closed while
driving. If either are open, a
passenger could be injured during a
crash or sudden stop.
Glove Boxes
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
201
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove boxes
closed while driving.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Open the center pocket by pulling
thehandle.Closeitwithafirmpush.
A coin holder is located in front of
the beverage holder. To use the coin
holder, pull the handle, then push
the button. The lid will swing open.
To close the lid, push it down until it
latches.
Make sure to close the lid before you
close the beverage holder.
Center Pocket Coin Pocket
Interior Convenience Items
202
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：１４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
in the rear compartment on the
driver’s side. To use the AC power
outlet, open the rear compartment
lid and open the outlet cover. Insert
the plug into the receptacle slightly,
turn it 90° clockwise, then push in
the plug all the way.
Always run the engine when you use
the AC power outlet.
There are two accessory power
sockets in your vehicle. One
accessory power socket is above the
center pocket and another is on the
cargo area sidewall on the driver’s
side.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
If equipped
AC Power OutletAccessory Power Sockets
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
203
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：２３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.
Interior Convenience Items
204
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２０９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The light control switch controls the
interior lights: the individual map
lights in the front, the individual map
lights above the second and third
row passengers. This switch has
three positions: OFF, door activated,
and ON.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
None of the lights come on when a
door is opened. The individual map lights in the
front come on when any door is
opened. When the doors are
closed, each light can be turned on
and off by pressing the lenses.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows come on
when any door is opened. When
the doors are closed, each light
canbeturnedonandoffby
pushingonthelens.
When the switch is in the OFF position: When the switch is in the door activated
position:
CONTINUED
Light Control Switch
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
205
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn on the front and rear individual
map lights by pushing the lens of
each light. Push the lens again to
turn it off. You can also operate
these lights with the light control
switch (see page ).
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light(s) dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds.
With the light control switch in the
door activated position, all the
individual map lights come on when
you unlock the door with the remote
transmitter (see page ).
With any door left open, the lights
stay on about 3 minutes, then go out.
You can change the ‘‘INTERIOR
LIGHT DIMMING TIME’’ setting on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
All the individual map lights come
onandstayonaslongasthe
switch remains in the ON position.
On Touring models
147
118
205
When the switch is in the ON position:
Individual Map Lights
Interior Lights
206
Front
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：４３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door, and
stays on several seconds after you
close the door.
The cargo area light has a three-
position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
Ignition Switch LightCargo Area Light
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
207
OFF
ON
Rear
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The courtesy lights in the front
doors come on when you open any
door.
The courtesy light between the map
lights come on when you turn the
parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the select/reset
knob on the instrument panel.
Courtesy Lights
Interior Lights
208
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３１：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them. (If you have an optional
audio system, refer to the operating
instructions that came with it.)
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
Theclimatecontrolsystemandthe
audio system have a voice control
feature. Refer to the navigation
system manual for more information.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 210
Using Automatic Climate
...................................Control . 215
.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 216
..............Climate Control Sensors . 220
................................Audio System . 221
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 222
................................Playing a Disc . 226
.......Disc Player Error Messages . 233
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 234
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 238
.................................Playing Discs . 244
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 251
..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 252
.Playing the XM
Satellite Radio . 257
.................................Playing Discs . 263
...Disc Changer Error Messages . 271
..................Protecting Your Discs . 272
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 275
...............................Playing a Tape . 277
..........................Setting the Clock . 281
................Remote Audio Controls . 282
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 283
.................Radio Theft Protection . 284
........Rear Entertainment System . 285
............................Security System . 318
...............................Cruise Control . 319
HomeLink
Universal
................................Transceiver . 322
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 325
................Parking Sensor System . 352
....Reaview Camera and Monitor . 356
LX and Canadian DX models
EX and EX-L models without navigation
system
Models with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Features
Features
209
０７／１１／０８ １９：０６：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１４
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Vents, Heating, and A/C
210
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
MODE
CONTROL
DIAL
AUTO
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
REAR
CONTROLLER
DIAL
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
EX, EX-L and Touring models
MODE
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR
ON/OFF
BUTTON
REAR LOCK
BUTTON
REAR TEMPERATURE
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
LX and Canadian DX models
０７／１１／０８ １９：０６：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲
▼
▲
▼
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Press the button to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
button to decrease it.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
Your vehicle has four temperature
control buttons, two for the driver,
and two for the front passenger.
When the rear passenger’s zone is
turned on using the REAR button on
the front control panel, a second row
passenger also can adjust the
temperature, fan speed and air flow.
The rear passenger compartment
temperature can also be set
separately. Press the top ( ) of the
appropriate temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow. Press the bottom ( ) of
the button to decrease it. Each set
temperature is shown in the display.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as ‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.
When you press this button, the
indicator in the button comes on, and
the passenger’s side temperature
and the rear passenger compartment
is synchronized to the driver’s side
set temperature. Changing the
passenger’s side temperature or the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment makes the indicator to
go off, and takes the system out of
SYNC mode.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. On LX and
Canadian DX models, the indicator in
thebuttonisonwhentheA/Cison.
On EX, EX-L, and Touring models,
you will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in
the display.
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
CONTINUED
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On LX and Canadian DX models
On LX and Canadian DX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Temperature Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
SYNC Button
Features
211
０７／１１／０８ １９：０６：３２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you switch to from
, the A/C stays on, and you
canturnitonandoffmanually.
When you switch to another mode,
the A/C returns to its original setting,
either on or off, as displayed by the
A/C indicator.
When you want to change the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment, press the REAR
button. The indicator in the button
comes on, and you can change the
temperature using the rear
temperature control button. When
you press the REAR LOCK button,
the indicator in the button comes on,
the rear A/C passenger control
panel is disabled, and you cannot
change any settings from it.
See page for how to operate the
rear passenger control panel.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard. In this mode, you cannot
turn off the A/C and also cannot
switch to fresh air mode.
The passenger’s temperature cannot
be set separately from the driver’s.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
Use the mode control dial or button
to select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select , the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
140
219
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On LX and Canadian DX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
REAR/REAR LOCK Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control
212
０７／１１／０８ １９：０６：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red mark,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
Press the A/C button. The
indicator in the button comes on
(LX and Canadian DX models) or
‘‘A/C ON’’ is shown in the display
(EX, EX-L and Touring models)
when a fan speed is selected.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear side
panels.
Set the temperature control dial or
button to the lower limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial or
buttons.
Make sure the temperature is set
to the lower limit.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
77
CONTINUED
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the A/CVentilation Using the Heater
Features
213
０７／１１／０８ １９：０７：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The indicator in the A/C button
will not come on (LX and Canadian
DX models), or the A/C ON
indicator will not come on (EX,
EX-L, and Touring models), if the
A/C was off to start with.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Switch the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C turns off. But
if it was on to start with, it stays on.
Set the fan to high.
Select . The system
automatically switches to the fresh
air mode and turns on the A/C.
The indicator in the A/C button
will not come on (LX and Canadian
DX models), or the A/C ON
indicator will not come on (EX,
EX-L, and Touring models), if the
A/C was off to start with.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
If the interior is very warm,
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Dehumidify the Interior
214
０７／１１／０８ １９：０７：２４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２１９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you set the temperature to its
lower or its upper limit, the system
runs at full cooling or heating only. It
does not regulate the interior
temperature.
Press the Auto button. The
indicator in the button comes on.
Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control button.
You will see AUTO in the system’s
display. You can set the driver’s
side temperature and passenger’s
side temperature and the
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment separately. The
system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
When you press a fan control button,
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left,
and turn the rear controller dial to
the OFF position.
Press the OFF button and the REAR
button (indicator is off).In AUTO mode, the rear passenger
compartment temperature is also
regulated independently.
In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interior
temperature is independently
regulated for the driver and
passenger. If the driver’s side of the
vehicle is getting too much sun, the
system will adjust to a lower
temperature.
1.
2.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On models with navigation system
On LX and Canadian DX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using Automatic Climate Control Semi-automatic Operation
To Turn Everything Off
Features
215
０７／１１／０８ １９：０７：３８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
The rear passengers can also adjust
the fan speed, temperature, and
airflow of the rear A/C unit with the
rear control panel.
With the dial in this position,
no air flows to the rear vents. The
rear control panel cannot be used by
a second row passenger to adjust the
rear A/C. Turning the dial clockwise
changes the fan speed to the rear
passengers.
With the dial in this position,
the rear control panel can be used by
a second row passenger to adjust the
rear fan speed, airflow, and
temperature.
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated by voice
control. See the navigation section in
your quick start guide for an
overview of this system, and the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
You can adjust the airflow of the rear
A/C unit with the rear controller dial
on the front control panel. The rear
passengers can also adjust the
direction and the amount of airflow
on the rear control panel.
You can adjust the temperature of
the rear A/C unit with the REAR
button and the rear temperature
control switch on the front control
panel.
(On front control panel)
On models with navigation system
On EX, EX-L, and Touring models
On LX and Canadian DX models
On LX and Canadian DX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Voice Control System
OFF
Rear Controller Dial
ON
Using the Rear A/C Unit
216
０７／１１／０８ １９：０７：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
When the
indicator in this button is off, no air
flows to the rear vents. The rear
control panel cannot be used by a
second row passenger to adjust the
rear A/C. When the indicator in this
button is on, the rear temperature
can be adjusted with the REAR
button in the center of the front
control panel. In addition, the rear
control panel can be used by a
second row passenger to adjust the
rearfanspeed,airflow,and
temperature.
When the
indicator in this button is on, the rear
control panel is disabled, and the
rear A/C can only be controlled by
the front control panel.
(On front control panel)
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
REAR A/C Controls
REAR Button
REAR LOCK Button
Features
217
REAR LOCK BUTTON
REAR TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTON
EX, EX-L and Touring models
REAR ON/OFF BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３３：２５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn the rear temperature control
dial clockwise to increase the
temperature of the airflow.
When is selected, airflow is
divided between the rear floor vents
and rear ceiling vents.
When is selected, air flows
from the rear floor vents.
When is selected, air flows
from the rear ceiling vents.
Select the vents the air flows from
with the mode control dial.
Turn the fan control dial clockwise
to increase fan speed and airflow.
The rear control panel can only be
used when the rear controller dial on
the front control panel is in the ON
position.
On LX and Canadian DX models
Rear Control Panel
Vents, Heating, and A/C
218
MODE CONTROL DIAL
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL DIAL
LX and Canadian DX models
０７／１１／０８ １９：０８：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲
▼
▲
▼
Press the top ( ) of the fan control
button to increase the fan speed and
airflow. Press the bottom ( ) of the
button to decrease it. The level of
the fan speed is shown in the display.
Each time you press the mode
button, the mode display changes
from , to , then to
.
When is selected, air flows
from the rear ceiling vents.
When is selected, air flows
from the rear floor vents.
When is selected, airflow is
divided between the rear floor vents
and rear ceiling vents.
Pressing the AUTO button puts the
system in automatic operation mode.
The rear system automatically
adjusts the fan speed and airflow
levels to maintain the selected
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment.
Pressing the OFF button shuts off
the rear climate control system.
Press the top ( ) of the
temperature control button to
increase the temperature of airflow,
and the bottom ( ) of the button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
The rear control panel can only be
used when the indicator in the REAR
LOCK button on the front control
panel is off.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
219
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTON
EX, EX-L and Touring models
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３３：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The direction and quantity of airflow
from each rear ceiling vent is
adjustable.
To adjust the direction of air coming
from a rear ceiling vent, move the
tab in the center of each vent back-
and-forth, and rotate the vent with
the tab. The lever next to each vent
can be opened and closed to regulate
the amount of airflow.
Theclimatecontrolsystemhasthree
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. There is also a rear
sensor on the rear sidewall near the
exhaust vent. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
Rear Ceiling Vents
Vents, Heating, and A/C, Climate Control Sensors
220
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TAB
LEVER
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３３：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
On LX and Canadian DX models, see
pages through .
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages through .
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages through .
For vehicles with rear entertainment
system, see pages through .
234 251
252 271
285 317
222 233
CONTINUED
Audio System
Features
221
EX and EX-L models
EX-L model with Rear Entertainment
System
U.S. EX-L and Touring models with
Rear Entertainment System with
Navigation System
LX and Canadian DX models
０７／１１／０８ １９：０８：１４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX and Canadian DX models)
222
SEEK BAR
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
０７／１１／０８ １９：０８：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
＋−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume
by turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it
press the or side of the bar,
then release it.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
CONTINUED
To Play the AM/FM Radio SCANTo Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX and Canadian DX models)
Features
223
０７／１１／０８ １９：０８：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
appears in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
275
To turn off auto select
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX and Canadian DX models)
AUTO SELECTPreset
224
０７／１１／０８ １９：０８：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２２９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the bass, treble,
balance, and fader settings.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the SOUND
(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting to
your liking. When the level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the
display. The system will
automatically return the display to
the selected audio mode about 5
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.
Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is turned
off.
139
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX and Canadian DX models)
Adjusting the Sound Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
Audio System Lighting
Features
225
０７／１１／０８ １９：０８：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
＋
Playing a Disc (LX and Canadian DX models)
226
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
SKIP BAR
DISC BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
DISP BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
SCAN/RPT
BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
０７／１１／０８ １９：０８：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED FORMAT,
andthenskipstothenextfile.
CONTINUED
Playing a Disc (LX and Canadian DX models)
To Play a Disc
Features
227
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／１１／０８ １９：０９：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
intherestofthewaytoplayit.You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
showninthedisplay.Whenplayinga
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
Each time you press the DISP
(preset 1) button, the display shows
you the text data on a disc, if the disc
was recorded with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
DISP button while a disc without text
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
272
Playing a Disc (LX and Canadian DX models)
To Load a Disc Text Data Display Function
228
０７／１１／０８ １９：０９：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
＋
−
＞
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to about
31 characters of the text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheDISP
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the DISP button.
Each time you press and
release the SKIP bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release the to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or SKIPbar.
You can use the SKIP bar while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
mode).
CONTINUED
Playing a Disc (LX and Canadian DX models)
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
Features
229
０７／１１／０８ １９：０９：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right until it clicks
once to skip to the next folder, and to
the left to move to the beginning of
the current folder. Turn it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder. Turning the TUNE knob
more than two clicks skips several
folders.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and hold
the SCAN/RPT button. You will see
SCAN in the display. You will get a
10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN/RPT button for about 2
seconds to get out of scan mode and
play the last track/file sampled.
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press and
hold the SCAN/RPT button to select
SCAN, then press and release the
button again to select folder scan.
You will see F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN/RPT button, the mode
changes from file scan to folder scan,
then to normal playing.
Playing a Disc (LX and Canadian DX models)
FOLDER SELECTION
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)
230
０７／１１／０８ １９：０９：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−−
CONTINUED
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the SCAN/RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press and hold the SCAN/
RPT button for 2 seconds to turn it
off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the SCAN/RPT button
twice. You will see F-RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current folder. Press the
SCAN/RPT button again to turn it
off.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN/RPT button, the mode
changes from file repeat to folder
repeat, then to normal playing.
This feature plays the
tracks (the files in MP3 or WMA
mode) within a disc in random order.
To activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
twice to select RDM (within a disc
random play). You will see RDM in
the display. Press the RDM button
again to turn it off.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing a Disc (LX and Canadian DX models)
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) FOLDER-REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
Features
231
０７／１１／０８ １９：０９：４７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
In MP3 or WMA mode
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM button. You will see
F-RDM in the display. The system
will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
and holding the RDM button for 2
seconds.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
Press the AM or FM button to
switch to the radio while a disc is
playing. Press the CD button to play
the disc.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.272
Playing a Disc (LX and Canadian DX models)
FOLDER-RANDOM
To Stop Playing a Disc Protecting Compact Discs
232
０７／１１／０８ １９：０９：５６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
CauseError Message
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
Solution
273
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Current track will skipped. The next supported
track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 273 ). Insert the disc again. If the
code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Player Error Messages (LX and Canadian DX models)
Features
233
UNSUPPORTED
FORMAT
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
０７／１１／０８ １９：１０：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
234
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTONS
PWR/VOL KNOB
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
SOUND
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
EX-L model is shown.
SEEK BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB SOUND (TUNE) KNOB
AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK BAR
AM BUTTON
EX-L model with Rear Entertainment SystemEX and EX-L models
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３５：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２３９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
＋−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume
by turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button, or AM/FM button. On
the FM band, ST will be displayed if
the station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it
press the or side of the bar,
then release it.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor5seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
The SCAN function
samples all stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal. When
it finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 5 seconds.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
Features
235
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３５：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
appears in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
275
To turn off auto select
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Preset AUTO SELECT
236
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３５：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the bass, treble,
balance, and fader settings.
Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is turned
off.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the SOUND
(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting to
your liking. When the level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the
display. The system will
automatically return the display to
the selected audio mode about 5
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.
139
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
Audio System Lighting
Features
237
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３６：０２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX and all EX-L models without navigation system)
238
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE KNOBPWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE KNOB
U.S. EX and EX-L models
U.S. model is shown.
EX-L model with Rear Entertainment System
CATEGORY BAR
DISP/MODE
BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
DISP/MODE
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
XM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
AUX/XM
BUTTON
U.S. EX
model
AUX (XM)
BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３６：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the AUX/XM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob. The last
channel you listened to will show in
the display.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, and Canada, except
Hawaii and Alaska. XM
is a
registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
XM satellite radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM satellite radio allows you to view
channel and category selections in
the display.
Though it is not equipped with an
XM satellite radio system, your
vehicle is ‘‘XM Ready.’’ If you
purchase an XM radio receiver, you
can connect it to your vehicle’s audio
system to receive XM broadcasts.
CONTINUED
U.S. EX models
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX and all EX-L models without navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio
MODE
Features
239
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３６：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−＋
−−On models with a rear entertainment
system, you cannot listen to XM
Radio and a disc at the same time.
For example, when XM Radio is
playing on the front speakers, you
cannot listen to a disc on the rear
speakers, or vice versa.
Turn the tune knob left or
right to select channels. In the
category mode, you can only select
channels within that category.
Press either side of
the bar ( or ) to select another
category.
The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the AUX/XM button. Either
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.
Use the selector knob, or the
CATEGORYbarorSCANbutton
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
1.
2.
3.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX and all EX-L models without navigation system)
TUNE
CATEGORY
SCAN Preset
240
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３６：２５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM button again. The
other XM band will show. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription.
The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX and all EX-L models without navigation system)
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘NO INFO’’
‘‘CHECK
ANTENNA’’
Features
241
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３６：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX and all EX-L models without navigation system)
242
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
Signal weaker in these areas.
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles
to the south.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３６：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
Satellite Radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated,
‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in
the display, and you’ll be able to
listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM satellite radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system and press the AUX/XM
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM Canada at , or at
1-877-438-9677. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
www.xmradio.ca
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX and all EX-L models without navigation system)
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Features
243
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３６：４８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
−
＋
−
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
244
EX-L model with Rear Entertainment SystemEX and EX-L models
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
SCAN/RPT
BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
DISP
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
SCAN/RPT
BUTTON
DISP
BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
EJECT BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
DISC BUTTON
０７／１１／１５ ０８：５４：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２４９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer that holds up to
six discs. You operate this disc
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. To operate the disc
changer, the ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED FORMAT,
andthenskipstothenextfile.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
On the upper right side of the
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking,
and the green CD load indicator
will come on.
Press and hold the LOAD button
beside the CD slot until you see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Operating the CD Changer
Loading CDs in the Changer
Features
245
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３７：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD loaded indicator
turns red and blinks as the disc is
loaded.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last disc loaded.
If you are not loading discs into all
six positions, press the LOAD button
again after the last disc has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last disc loaded.
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 10 seconds, stop the load
operation, and begin playing the last
disc loaded.
To load a single disc:
Press and release the LOAD
button.
When the disc number for an
empty position starts to blink and
the green CD load indicator comes
on, you will see LOAD in the
display. Insert the disc into the CD
slot. Insert it only about halfway,
the drive will pull it in the rest of
the way.
The system will load the disc and
begin playing it.
If you press the LOAD button
while a disc is playing, the system
will stop playing that disc and start
the loading sequence. It will then
play the disc just loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is
playing by pressing the
appropriate preset button. Select
an empty position (the disc
number indicator is off), and press
the preset button for that position
(1 to 6). The system will stop
playing the current disc and start
the loading sequence. It will then
play the disc just loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next disc
into the CD slot.
1.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
246
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３７：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
＋
−
＞
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
DISP button while a disc without text
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to about
31 characters of the text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheDISP
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the DISP button.
You can use the SKIP bar while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
mode).
Each time you press and
release the SKIP bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release the to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or SKIPbar.
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
Features
247
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３７：３４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right until it clicks
once to skip to the next folder, and to
the left to move to the beginning of
the current folder. Turn it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder. Turning the TUNE knob
more than two clicks skips several
folders.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and hold
the SCAN/RPT button. You will see
SCAN in the display. You will get a
10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN/RPT button for about 2
seconds to get out of scan mode and
play the last track/file sampled.
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press and
hold the SCAN/RPT button to select
SCAN, then press and release the
button again to select folder scan.
You will see F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Press and hold the SCAN/RPT
button for 2 seconds to get out of
scan mode and play the last file
sampled.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first track (file
in MP3 or WMA) in each disc. To
activate the DISC SCAN feature,
press and hold the SCAN/RPT
button to select SCAN, then press
and release the button twice to select
disc scan. You will see D-SCAN in
the display. The system will then
play the first track/file in the disc for
about 10 seconds. If you do nothing,
the system will then play the first
track/file in the remaining discs for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first track/file of the last disc, the
system plays normally.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN/RPT button, the mode
changes from scan, to folder scan, to
disc scan, then to normal playing.
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
FOLDER SELECTION
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)
DISC SCAN
248
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３７：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− −
−
−
−
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the SCAN/RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press and hold the SCAN/
RPT button for 2 seconds to turn it
off.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM button. You will see
F-RDM in the display. The system
will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
and holding the RDM button for 2
seconds.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the SCAN/RPT button
twice. You will see F-RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current folder. Press and
hold the SCAN/RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
To activate the
DISC REPEAT feature, press the
SCAN/RPT button three times. You
will see ‘‘D-RPT’’ in the display as a
reminder. The system continuously
replays the current disc. Press the
SCAN/RPT button again to turn it
off.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN/RPT button, the mode
changes from file repeat, to folder
repeat, to disc repeat, then to normal
playing.
This feature plays the
tracks (the files in MP3 or WMA
mode) within a disc in random order.
To activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
twice to select RDM (within a disc
random play). You will see RDM in
the display. Press the RDM button
again to turn it off.
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) FOLDER-RANDOM
FOLDER-REPEAT
DISC REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
Features
249
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３７：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system automatically begins
the load sequence so you can load
another disc in that position. If you
do not load another disc after 15
seconds, the system selects the
previous mode (AM, FM, or XM).
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds, and select the
previous mode (AM, FM, or XM). To
begin playing the disc, press the CD
button.
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button.
If you press the eject button while
listening to the radio, or with the
audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject up to six discs, one at a
time.
272
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Protecting Compact Discs
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
250
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３７：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause SolutionError Message
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
273
High temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 273 ). Insert the disc again. If the
code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot
be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Changer Error Messages (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Features
251
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３８：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The audio system for your vehicle
can also be operated by voice control.
See the navigation section in your
quick start guide for an overview of
this system, and the navigation
system manual for complete details.
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System
252
SCAN BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
SEEK BAR
AM/FM BUTTON
XM BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３８：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
＋−
−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume
by turning the same knob.
You can also operate the audio
system using the control icons on the
audio screen.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction in
AM is not available.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it
press the or side of the bar,
then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button (icon), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button (icon).
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio
To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
Preset
Features
253
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３８：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
appears in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
press the
A.SEL button or touch the AUTO
SELECTicon.Thisrestoresthe
presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the bass, treble,
balance, and fader settings.
Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the SOUND
(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting to
your liking. When the level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the
display. The system will
automatically return the display to
the selected audio mode about 5
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.
275
To turn off auto select,
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUTO SELECT Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
254
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３８：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２５９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
In addition to the knobs and buttons
on the radio control panel, you can
operate some of the radio controls
on the navigation system screen.
While you are listening to the radio,
you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon
(FM1, FM2, or AM).
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SEEK
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages and .
Touch the
AUTO SELECT icon to activate the
auto select function. You will see
AUTO SEL in the upper display.
Touch the SCAN icon to
activate the scan function. You will
see SCAN on the display. Touch the
icon again to deactivate it.
253 254
CONTINUED
On models with navigation system
Operating the Radio on the
Navigation System Screen
AUTO SELECT
SCAN
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
255
AUDIO BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３８：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
＋− You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is turned
off.
To adjust the treble
and bass, touch or on each
side of the treble or bass adjustment
bar. The adjustment bar shows you
the current setting.
These modes adjust
the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjust the front-to-back strength. To
adjust the left/right balance, touch
the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon.
To adjust the front/rear fader, touch
the ‘‘FR’’ or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
To see the audio display when you
are finished adjusting the sound,
wait 5 seconds.
You can also adjust the sound from
the navigation screen.
To adjust the sound, push the
AUDIO button, then enter the sound
grid by touching the SOUND icon on
the display.
139
Audio System LightingTreble/Bass
Left/Right Balance and Front/
Rear Fader
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)
256
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３８：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
257
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN/RPT BUTTON
XM BUTTON
SEEK BAR
DISP/MODE BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３８：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, CD, etc. by
touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display (navigation system
screen).
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
PWR/VOL knob. The last channel
you listened to will show in the
display.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States, and Canada, except
Hawaii and Alaska. XM
is a
registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
The navigation system screen also
shows all XM information when the
AUDIO button is pressed.
Operating the XM Radio
MODE
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
258
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３９：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−＋
−
−
On models with a rear entertainment
system and a navigation system, you
cannot listen to XM Radio and a disc
at the same time. For example, when
XM Radio is playing on the front
speakers, you cannot listen to a disc
on the rear speakers, or vice versa.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN/RPT button or
touch the SCAN icon on the audio
display. The system plays each
channel in numerical order for a few
seconds, then selects the next
channel. When you hear a channel
you want to continue listening to,
press the button or touch the icon
again.
Press either side of
the bar ( or ) to select another
category.
To store a channel:
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons or preset icons on the audio
display. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
Turn the tune knob left or
right to select channels. In the
category mode, you can only select
channels within that category.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Pick the preset button (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the button (icon) until you
hear a beep.
Use the TUNE knob, the
CATEGORY bar, or the SCAN
button to tune to a desired channel.
You can also touch the SCAN icon
on the audio display.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it.
Press the button. Either
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.
Press the button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SCAN
CATEGORY
Preset
TUNE
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
259
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３９：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
XM is loading the
audio or program
information.
The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.
The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.
There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
The selected channel
number does not exist, or
isnotpartofyour
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
This channel has no
artist or title
information at this
time.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘CHECK
ANTENNA’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘NO INFO’’
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
260
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３９：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Features
261
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
Signal may be blocked by mountains
or large obstacles to the south.
Signal weaker in these areas.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３９：２６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There may also be other geographic
situations or structures that could
affect satellite radio reception.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM satellite radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system and press the XM RADIO
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM Canada at , or at
1-877-438-9677. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
andyou’llbeabletolistentoXM
radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
www.xmradio.ca
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
262
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３９：３２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−＋
CONTINUED
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Features
263
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATORCD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
SCAN/RPT BUTTON
RDM BUTTON
DISP BUTTON
SKIP BAR
DISC BUTTON DISC BUTTON
CD BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３９：３８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle’s audio system has an
in-dash disc changer that holds up to
six discs. You operate this disc
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. To operate the disc
changer, the ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED FORMAT,
andthenskipstothenextfile.
Operating the CD Changer
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
264
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：３９：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２６９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The CD changer is behind the
navigation system screen. To use the
CD changer, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the CD changer appears.
To load multiple discs in one
operation:
Press and hold the LOAD button
beside the CD slot until you see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
The indicators above the disc
buttons of the empty positions will
blink, and the green load indicator
above the CD slot comes on.
Insert a disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns red and blinks as the disc is
loaded.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the first disc loaded.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next disc
into the CD slot.
If you stop loading discs before all
six positions are filled, the system
will wait for 10 seconds, then stop
the load operation and begin playing
the last disc loaded.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the OPEN button
again. Do not use the folded screen
as a tray. If you put a cup, for
example, on the screen, the liquid
inside the cup may spill on the
screen when you go over a bump.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Loading Discs in the In-dash Disc
Changer
Features
265
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR
OPEN BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To load a single disc:
Press and release the LOAD
button.
TheindicatorsabovetheDisc
buttons of the empty positions will
blink, and the green CD load
indicator comes on. When you see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, insert the
disc into the CD slot. Insert it only
about halfway; the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way.
The system will load the disc and
begin playing it.
If you press the LOAD button while
a disc is playing, the system will stop
playing that disc and start the
loading sequence. It will then play
the disc just loaded.
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate disc
button. Select an empty disc button
(the indicator above the button is
off), and press the button. The
system will stop playing the current
disc and start the loading sequence.
It will then play the disc just loaded.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
DISP button while a disc without text
data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
2.
1.
3.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
266
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
＋
−
＞
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to about
31 characters of the text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheDISP
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you turn on the audio system
next time, the system keeps your
selection with the DISP button.
You can use the SKIP bar while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
mode).
Each time you press and
release the SKIP bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release the to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or SKIPbar.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
Features
267
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right until it clicks
once to skip to the next folder, and to
the left to move to the beginning of
the current folder. Turn it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder. Turning the TUNE knob
more than two clicks skips several
folders.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and hold
the SCAN/RPT button. You will see
SCAN in the display. You will get a
10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN/RPT button for about 2
seconds to get out of scan mode and
play the last track/file sampled.
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press and
hold the SCAN/RPT button to select
SCAN, then press and release the
button again to select folder scan.
You will see F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Press and hold the SCAN/RPT
button for 2 seconds to get out of
scan mode and play the last file
sampled.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first track (file
in MP3 or WMA) in each disc. To
activate the DISC SCAN feature,
press and hold the SCAN/RPT
button to select SCAN, then press
and release the button twice to select
disc scan. You will see D-SCAN in
the display. The system will then
play the first track/file in the disc for
about 10 seconds. If you do nothing,
the system will then play the first
track/file in the remaining discs for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first track/file of the last disc, the
system plays normally.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN/RPT button, the mode
changes from scan, to folder scan, to
disc scan, then to normal playing.
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
FOLDER SELECTION
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)
DISC SCAN
268
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
− −
−
−
−
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the SCAN/RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press and hold the SCAN/
RPT button for 2 seconds to turn it
off.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM button. You will see
F-RDM in the display. The system
will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
and holding the RDM button for 2
seconds.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the SCAN/RPT button
twice. You will see F-RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current folder. Press and
hold the SCAN/RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN/RPT button, the mode
changes from file repeat, to folder
repeat, to disc repeat, then to normal
playing.
To activate the
DISC REPEAT feature, press the
SCAN/RPT button three times. You
will see ‘‘D-RPT’’ in the display as a
reminder. The system continuously
replays the current disc. Press the
SCAN/RPT button again to turn it
off.
This feature plays the
tracks (the files in MP3 or WMA
mode) within a disc in random order.
To activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
twice to select RDM (within a disc
random play). You will see RDM in
the display. Press the RDM button
again to turn it off.
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) FOLDER-RANDOM
FOLDER-REPEAT
DISC REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
Features
269
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：３４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.
When you remove the disc from the
slot, the system automatically begins
the load sequence so you can load
another disc in that position. If you
do not load another disc after 15
seconds, the system selects the
previous mode (AM, FM, or XM).
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds, and select the
previous mode (AM, FM, or XM). To
begin playing the disc, press the CD
button.
To remove a different disc from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button.
If you press the eject button while
listening to the radio, or with the
audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject up to six discs, one at a
time.
272
Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)
Protecting Compact Discs
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
270
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
SolutionError Message Cause
273
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 273 ). Insert the disc again. If the
code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot
be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
High temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Disc Changer Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
Features
271
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORTED
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When recording a CD-R, the
recording must be closed for it to
be used.
CD-RW discs will not work in this
unit.
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality discs labeled for audio
use.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player or the disc changer.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the disc to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
272
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４０：５８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The in-dash disc player/changer has
a sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
maybecomestuckinsideand
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs
Damaged discs Poor quality discs
1.
2. 3.
CONTINUED
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
Protecting Your Discs
Features
273
Sealed
Warped
Burrs
Chipped/
Cracked
With Label/
Sticker
With Plastic
Ring
Using Printer
Label Kit
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４１：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
This audio unit cannot play a Dual-
disc
.
4. 5.
Protecting Your Discs
274
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Arrow ShapeCan Shape
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４１：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２７９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
275
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４１：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources
(such as garages or parking
structures) can cause temporary
reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
276
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４１：３６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Playing a Tape (Optional)
Features
277
FF BUTTON
SKIP BAR
DOLBY
NR BUTTON
DOLBY
NR BUTTON
REW BUTTON REW BUTTON
FF BUTTON
SKIP BAR
EX and EX-L models without Rear
Entertainment System
RPT BUTTON
PLAY/PROG
BUTTON
PLAY/PROG
BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
U.S. EX-L model is shown.
LX and Canadian DX models
０７／１１／０８ １９：１８：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Playing a Tape (Optional)
278
FF BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
DOLBY
NR BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
REW BUTTON
PLAY/PROG
BUTTON
REW BUTTON
DOLBYNRBUTTON
FF BUTTON
EX-L and Touring models with Rear Entertainment System
and Navigation System
EX-L model with Rear Entertainment System without
Navigation System
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４１：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
−
▲
＊
Dolby noise reduction turns on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator will come on in the
display. If the tape was not recorded
in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the
NR button. Dolby remains off until
you press the NR button again.
To remove the tape, press the
EJECT button. If you want to turn
the player off, press the PWR/VOL
knob or turn off the ignition. The
tape will remain in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,the
tape will begin playing where it left
off.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the AM
or FM button or AM/FM button, or
CD button. To change back to the
tape player, press the AUX button.
To rewind the tape,
push the REW button. You will see
REW in the display. To fast forward
the tape, push the FF button. You
will see FF displayed. Press the FF,
REW, or PLAY/PROG button to
take the system out of rewind or fast
forward.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Make sure the open side of
thetapeisfacingright,theninsert
thetapemostofthewayintotheslot.
Thesystemwillpullthetapeinthe
rest of the way and begin to play it.
The tape direction indicator will
come on to show you which side of
the tape is playing. The indicates
the side you inserted upward is now
playing. If you want to play the other
side, press the PLAY/PROG button.
When the player reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
CONTINUED
Optional on some models
To Play a Tape
To Stop Playing a Tape
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
Playing a Tape (Optional)
Features
279
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４１：５８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
＋
−
Press the side of the
SKIP bar to find the beginning of the
current song or passage. Press the
side of the SKIP bar to find the
beginning of a song or passage.
When the system reaches the
beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
Thetapeplayerpicksupdirtand
oxides from the tape. This
contamination builds up over time
and causes the sound quality to
degrade. To prevent this, you should
clean the player after every 30 hours
of use.
If you do not clean the tape player
regularly, it may eventually become
impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit. Your dealer has a
cleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or
jam in the drive.
Press the RPT button
to continuously play a song or
passage. You will see RPT displayed.
The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button again.
The skip and repeat
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
Store tapes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the tape player.
If the tape is loose, tighten it by
turning the hub with a pencil or your
finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.
SKIP Caring for the Tape and Player
REPEAT
Playing a Tape (Optional)
280
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４２：０６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you may
need to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing and
holding the CLOCK button, then
pressing the R (RESET) button sets
the clock back to the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
When you are finished, press the
CLOCK button again.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
Press and hold the CLOCK button
until the clock flashes. Change the
hours by pressing the H button until
the numbers advance to the desired
time. Change the minutes by
pressing the M button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.
Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Setting the Clock
Features
281
CLOCK BUTTON
R BUTTON
M BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTON
H BUTTON R BUTTON
M BUTTON
EX and EX-L models
U.S. EX-L model is shown.
H BUTTON
LX and Canadian DX models
０７／１１／０８ １９：１８：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
−
▲▼
＋
−
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. They let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the steering wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (if
equipped). On models with satellite
radio system, you can also select
XM1 and XM2.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
each time you press the top ( ) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
( ) to return to the beginning of the
current track/file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track/file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Remote Audio Controls
282
MODE BUTTONVOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４２：２３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
The auxiliary input jack is on the
dashboard next to the accessory
power socket. The system will accept
auxiliary input from standard audio
accessories.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Features
283
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４２：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle’s audio system may
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code with
the preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from the five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have 10 tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in 10 attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from your dealer.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see CODE in the
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code.
Thecodeisontheradiocodecard
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Radio Theft Protection
284
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４２：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２８９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
285
Overhead Screen Unit
DVD Player
Models with Navigation System
Models without Navigation System
REAR CTRL KNOBREAR PWR BUTTON
REAR CTRL KNOBREAR PWR BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４２：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press the REAR PWR button. To
turn on the rear controls (ceiling
panel/remote control), press the RR
CTRL knob. The system’s icon
shows in the upper display. Your
passengers can then operate the rear
system with the control panel in the
ceiling. The rear control panel can be
used as a remote control when it is
detached from the ceiling unit. Press
the RR CTRL knob again to turn the
rear controls off. You will see the
RearControlsOfficonintheupper
display.
The rear system selects the source it
waslastsetto.Ifthatsourcehas
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),
you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
display. You should select another
source or insert a DVD.
Whenyouturnonthesystem,the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
upper display. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the wireless
headphones.
Ifyouwanttoturntherearspeakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until the Rear Speakers
Off icon goes off.
The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.
With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (AM/FM
radio, XM radio, CD changer, DVD
player or AUX) than the front seat
occupants. The audio is broadcast
through the supplied wireless
headphones.
Available on EX-L and Touring models
To Turn On the System Rear Speakers
Rear Entertainment System
286
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４２：４８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs and CDs.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, turn the
RR CTRL knob counterclockwise.
The amber RR LED comes on to
show that the control panel is
enabled.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,
select CD. If a CD is loaded in the
lower player, select DVD/AUX.
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
CONTINUED
To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
Features
287
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OPEN BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４２：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Rear Entertainment System
288
PLAY BUTTON
PLAY BUTTON PAUSE
BUTTON
REAR CTRL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR
PAUSE BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
REAR CTRL KNOB
EJECT BUTTON
Models without Navigation System
Models with Navigation System
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：０２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
＋
−
＋
−
−
−
Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, turn the REAR
CTRL knob counterclockwise.
Press and hold the
side to move forward; you will see
‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and hold
the sidetomovebackward;you
will see ‘‘REV’’ in the display.
Release the bar when the system
reaches the point you want.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
side of the bar to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track or
chapter. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.
Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.
The amber Rear LED comes on to
show that the control panel is now
enabled.
Insert a DVD into the DVD/CD
player below the front panel.
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
Press the PLAY button if
the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
Press the PAUSE button
to pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
Rear Entertainment System
EJECT
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
SEEK/SKIP
PLAY
PAUSE
Features
289
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲▼
▲▼
▲
▼
Use the and buttons to select a
station from the preset buttons.
Press the button to search up
the channels in the channel mode.
The system will search up the
channels within the category when
the radio is in the category mode.
Press the button to search
down the channels in the channel
mode. The system will search down
the channels within the category
when the radio is in the category
mode.
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the PWR button. Use the AM/
FM button, XM button, CD button,
DVD/AUX button to select the
entertainment source. The selected
source will be shown in the display.
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled with the REAR
CTRL knob on the front panel.
Use the and buttons to select a
station from the preset buttons.
Press the button to tune the radio
to a higher frequency, or press the
button to tune to a lower
frequency. Pressing the or
button causes the system to
search up or down the band for a
station with a strong signal. You will
seeSEEKinthedisplay.
Rear Entertainment System
Using the Rear Control Panel
To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
290
XM BUTTON
CD BUTTON
DISP BUTTON
PWR BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON DVD/AUX
BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲▼
Press the or button to
select another category.
Pressing and holding the DISP
button for more than 5 seconds will
change the search mode between
Channel Search and Category
Search. Each time you press and
release the DISP button, the display
above the rear control panel changes
in the following sequence: Channel
Number, Category Name, Music
Name, Artist Name, Channel Name,
and back to Channel Number.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,
select them by pressing the CD
button. If a CD is loaded in the DVD
player, press the DVD/AUX button.
To rewind the tape, push the
button. You will see REW in
the display. To fast forward the tape,
push the button. You will see
FF displayed.
Pressthe buttontofindthe
beginning of the current song or
passage. Press the button to
find the beginning of the next song
or passage.
Press the button to change the
tape direction.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next track. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of the current track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or button.
The system will continue to move
through the track. Press the
button to move forward, or the
button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
and the overhead screen is not open,
pressing the or button changes
the discs.
To Play a CD from the Rear
Control Panel
To Play the Optional Tape Player
from the Rear Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
Features
291
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
Press the button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press the button again quickly
to go to the previous chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the button to
move forward, or the button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.
ToselectthemenuontheDVD,
press the MENU/SCROLL button.
Usethe,,,and
buttons to move to the desired
menu selection, then press the ENT
button to enter your selection.
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
292
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OVERHEAD SCREEN
DISP BUTTON
OPEN
BUTTON
ENT BUTTON
MENU/SCROLL BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you press the DISP button
while a DVD is playing, the title,
chapter, elapsed time, and personal
surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 1).
When you press the DISP button
again, the subtitle, audio, angle,
sound characteristics, and personal
surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 2).
To go back to play, press the DISP
button.
DISP Button
Rear Entertainment System
Features
293
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：４３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you press the MENU button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s
main menu is displayed. To go back
to play, press the RETURN button.
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s
setup menu is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. You can then
change various settings of play mode,
personal surround, and display. To
go back to play without changing any
setting, press the RETURN or
SETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ by
pressing the or button, the
play mode setup menu is displayed
abovethe‘‘PlayMode’’icon.
MENU Button System Messages
Play Mode
Rear Entertainment System
294
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：５１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０２９９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
▼▲
▼▲
Top Menu Audio
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’
using the or button, the DVD’s
title menu is displayed. This menu is
also displayed when you press the
MENU button while a DVD is not
playing.
When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from the
play mode setup menu by pressing
the or button, you will see a
submenu of the dubbed language.
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
notbeavailableonsomeDVDs.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
Select the desired language by
pressing the or button. The
sound characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language are also
displayed next to the language.
To go back to play, press the return
button.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
295
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４３：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３００
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
▼
▲▼▲
▼▲
Subtitle Angle
To turn the subtitle on and off, select
‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu by
pressing the or button. You will
see submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select
‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the or
button.
If more than one subtitle language is
available, you will see the language
currently selected when you select
‘‘ON’’ in the previous step.
Select the desired subtitle language
by pressing the or button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
On some DVDs, the scenes are
recorded by more than one camera,
giving different viewpoints of the
same scene. To change the angle,
select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.
Youwillseeasubmenuifthereare
different angles available.
Select the number on the submenu
by pressing the or button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
Rear Entertainment System
296
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４４：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
▼▲
▼▲
▼
▲
Search
When you select ‘‘Search’’ from the
play mode setup menu, you will see
the submenu shown above. In the
left submenu, you can select
between ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ The
right submenu displays the current
title or chapter number and the total
number of titles or chapters.
To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ by
pressing the or button. Change
the number on the right submenu by
pressing the or button, and
press the ENT button to begin the
title search. If you press the
RETURN button, the display returns
totheplaymodesetupmenuwithout
doing the search.
To do a chapter search, select
‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the or
button. Change the number on the
right submenu by pressing the or
button, and press the ENT button
to begin the chapter search. If you
press the RETURN button, the
display returns to the play mode
setup menu without doing the search.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
297
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４４：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Num Input
A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a two digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.
Select and enter the second digit
number the same way. The cursor
will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’
icon when you press the ENT button.
Press the ENT button to enter the
number command. To go back to the
DVD screen, press the RETURN
button.
Select the first digit number using
the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. If you want to
change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’
and press the ENT button, then
select and enter the new number.
Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the play
mode setup menu. The screen will
change as shown above. If you select
the ‘‘Move Key’’ using the ,
, , or button, and
press the ENT button, the Num
Input display on the screen will
changefromtheleftsidetoright
side or right to left.
Rear Entertainment System
298
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４４：２４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
When you select ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ by pressing the
or button, the personal
surround setup menu is displayed
above the ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ icon. You can adjust these display
settings:
Back Light
Contrast
Brightness
Tint
Color
To adjust the display, select
‘‘Display’’ by pressing the or
button, and enter your
selection by pressing the ENT
button. The display changes as
shown above.
Selecting one of the sound effects,
Cinema,Music,orVoice,fromthe
personal surround menu allows you
to change the sound in your
headphones to match the disc you
are playing.
Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by pressing the or button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
disappears, and there will be no
special sound effect.
CONTINUED
Personal Surround Display
Rear Entertainment System
Features
299
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４４：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
▼▲
Select the quality you want to adjust
by pressing the or button, and
then pressing the ENT button. The
adjustment bar is displayed next to
the selected item. Adjust the setting
by pressing the or button.
When you are finished with your
adjustment, press the ENT button.
If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
pressing the or button, and,
then pressing the ENT button.
The display changes as shown above.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for 5 seconds.
Rear Entertainment System
300
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４４：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Screen Mode
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
301
Normal Wide
Zoom Full
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４４：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing
the or button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the or button, then
press the ENT button.
The selected setting will be
highlighted in blue for one second,
and the screen returns to the play
mode in the selected setting.
Rear Entertainment System
302
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４４：５１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
When you press the SETUP button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.
When you select ‘‘Language’’ with
the or button, the menu
shown above appears.
To return to the stop or prestop
screen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the
or button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.
To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ by
pressing the or button. You will
see the submenu next to ‘‘Menu
Lang.’’
There are two selectable menus:
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’
Menu Language
CONTINUED
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)
Rear Entertainment System
Features
303
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
Select the desired language by
pressing the or button, and
then pressing the ENT button.
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, German,
Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.
If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT
button. The display changes as
showninthenextcolumn.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
menu.
Rear Entertainment System
304
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：０６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３０９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
Audio Language
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first number digit
usingthe,,,or
button, and press the ENT
button to enter it. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When the
fourth digit is entered, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
If you made a mistake entering a
number digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the
display with the , , ,
or button, and press the ENT
buttononthecontrolpanel.Then
select and enter the correct number
digit as described. The display
returns to the initial ‘‘Language’’
menu screen.
You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressing
the or button. You will see the
submenu next to ‘‘Audio Language.’’
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
305
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
Subtitle Language
You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ by
pressing the or button. You will
see the submenu next to the
‘‘Subtitle Language.’’
When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the
bottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’
screen, the above menu appears on
the screen.
Dynamic Range
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)
Rear Entertainment System
306
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：２４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲ ▼▲
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic
Range’’ by pressing the or
button, you will see the submenu
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as
shown above.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the or button, and then
press the ENT button.
Angle Mark
When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.
Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
or button. The above submenu
appears. If you want the angle mark
to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
or button, and then press
the ENT button. The display returns
to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
307
ANGLE MARK
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
Parental Control Level
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.
Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressing
the or button. You will see the
submenu shown above. If you select
‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, the
display returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’
the display changes as shown above.
To change the level, you need to
enter your four digit password.
Select the number for the first digit
by pressing the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.
Rear Entertainment System
308
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼▲
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password.
If you enter the password correctly,
you can then change the parental
control level.
Once you correctly enter the
password, press the or button
to change the level, and then press
the ENT button to enter your
selection.
Changing the Password
The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
when the vehicle left the factory.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
309
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：４７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To change the password, select
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
Select the first digit by pressing the
, , , or button,
and enter it by pressing the ENT
button. Repeat this until all four
digits are entered. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
password setting steps until you
enter the correct password.
Rear Entertainment System
310
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４５：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▲
If you forget the password, select
‘‘Password,’’ and press the button
10 times.
The display changes as shown above.
If you want to use the default
password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and
press the ENT button.
The message ‘‘Default password
setting applied’’ is displayed for
5 seconds.
Rear Entertainment System
Features
311
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If it takes several pushes on the
button to operate the rear
entertainment system, have your
dealer replace the batteries as soon
as possible.
The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and
used as a remote control. To remove
it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
Battery type: BR3032
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Remote Control Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
Rear Entertainment System
312
COVER
RELEASE BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：０６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
272
As required by the FCC: This device
complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Rear Entertainment System
Protecting DVDs
Playable DVDs
Features
313
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：１５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Message
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Solution
273
ERROR F0
ERROR F2
Invalid region code
Invalid disc
Parental control active.
Change level to view.
Eject the disc and reinsert it.
Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc
compatible with this system.
Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (see
pages 308 and 309 ).
DVD Player Error Messages
Rear Entertainment System
314
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：２２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３１９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Some state and local government
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
To use the headphones, pivot the
earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat.
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. Wearing the
headphones backwards may affect
audio reception, limiting the sound
quality and range.
Wireless Headphones
Rear Entertainment System
Features
315
VOLUME
DIAL
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are under the
third row seat armrest on the driver’s
side. To access these connectors,
open the cover by pulling up on the
lever.
Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
the diagram next to the battery slot.
Slide the cover back into place on the
earpiece, then press down on the
back edge to lock it in place.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Each headphone uses one AAA
battery. The battery is under the
cover on the left earpiece. To
remove the cover, insert a coin in the
slot and twist it slightly to pry the
cover away from the earpiece. Pull
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way.
Rear Entertainment System
Auxiliary Input Jacks
Replacing Batteries
316
COVER
BATTERY
LEVERARMREST
COIN
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
There are two headphone
connectors for the third row seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
Some video game power supplies
may cause poor picture quality.
V=Videojack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
Rear Entertainment System
Features
317
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
VOLUME DIALS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doorsandthetailgatefromthe
outside with the key, driver’s lock
tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
The alarm will also be activated if
the passenger inside the locked
vehicle turns the ignition switch on.
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. Before you leave the
vehicle, make sure the doors,
tailgate, and hood are securely
closed.
To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Security System
318
NOTE:
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshifttoholdthesetspeed.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
thecruisecontrol.Toresumetheset
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
1.
2.
3.Using Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
319
CANCEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４６：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
You can increase the set speed in
any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired speed, release the button.
You can decrease the set speed in
any of these ways:
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set speed.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
320
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４７：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous set speed.
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
thesamespeedasbefore.
The cruise control will be canceled
when the vehicle speed reaches
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
Cancelling Cruise Control
Resuming the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
321
CANCEL BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４７：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
×
−
The HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
Refer to the safety information that
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
ofthewayofthedevicetoprevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
General Information
Important Safety Precautions
Training HomeLink
Before you begin
322
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４７：２２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
323
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４７：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
324
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４７：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３２９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To use the HFL, your phone must
have approved Bluetooth capability
along with the Hands Free Profile.
This type of phone is available
through many phone makers and
cellular carriers. You can also find an
approved phone by visiting
, or by calling
the Hands Free Link
consumer
support at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,
visit , or call (888) 9-
HONDA-9.
HFL recognizes simple voice
commands, such as phone numbers
and names. It uses these commands
to automatically dial, receive, and
store numbers. For more
information on voice control, see
UsingVoiceControlonpage .
Bluetooth
is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to the HFL.
TheHFLusesaClass2Bluetooth,
which means the maximum range
between your phone and vehicle is
30 feet (10 meters).
The Bluetooth
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
With a linked phone, the HFL allows
you to send and receive calls in your
vehicle without holding the phone.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink (HFL).
HFL uses Bluetooth
technology to
link your cellphone to your vehicle.
With HFL, you can place and receive
calls through your vehicle’s audio
system, without the distraction of
handling your cellphone. To use this
feature, you need a Bluetooth-
compatible cellphone with the Hands
Free Profile. For more information,
and a list of compatible cellphones,
visit , or call
(888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit
, or call (888) 9-HONDA-9.
The HFL is available in both English
and French (Canadian models only).
To change the language, see page
.
Here are the main features of the
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL
begin on page .
349
328
328
handsfreelink.honda.com
www.honda.ca
handsfreelink.honda.com
www.
honda.ca
Touring models only
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Voice Control
Bluetooth Wireless
Technology
Incoming/Outgoing Calls
Features
325
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４７：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To operate the HFL, use the HFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel.
The HFL microphone is on the
ceiling, between the front map lights
and the HomeLink buttons. On
models with navigation system, the
microphone is shared with the
navigation system.
When the HFL is in use, the sound
comes through the vehicle’s front
audio system speakers. If the audio
system is in use while operating
either of the HFL buttons or making
a call, the HFL over-rides the audio
system. To change the volume level,
use the audio system volume knob,
or the steering wheel volume
controls.
Your vehicle’s HFL system has the
cellular phonebook import function.
This allows you to import your
cellular phonebook to the HFL.
Using the navigation system, you can
makeacalldirectlyandstorea
desired number in the HFL from the
list shown on the navigation display.
For more information on how to
import the phonebook or to make a
call, see page .
You can also store the desired
number to the HFL directly from
your cellular phone using the receive
contact function in the HFL.
The HFL can store up to 50 names
and phone numbers in its phonebook.
Withalinkedphone,youcanthen
automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
335
HFL ButtonsMicrophone
Audio System
Phonebook
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
326
HFL TALK
BUTTON
HFL BACK
BUTTON
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４７：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you are operating the HFL,
dialing or receiving calls with the
audio system in use, you will see the
above screen on the navigation
display.
The HFL buttons are used as
follows:
HFLTalk:Thisbuttonisusedbefore
you give a command, to answer
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.
Press and release the button, then
wait for a beep before giving a
command.
HFLBack:Thisbuttonisusedto
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
cancel an operation.
You will also see ‘‘HANDS FREE
LINK’’ on the audio display.
‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed on
the audio display if your phone is
linked to the Bluetooth
compatible
cell phone.
Information Display
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
327
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４８：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
TheHFLisoperatedbytheHFL
Talk and Back buttons on the left
side of the steering wheel. The next
few pages provide instructions for all
basic features of the HFL.
Here are some guidelines for using
voice control:
To enter a command, press and
release the Talk button. Then,
after the beep, say your command
in a clear, natural tone.
Close the windows and the
moonroof.
Give a voice command in a clear
natural speaking voice without
pausing between words or
numbers. If the system cannot
recognize your command because
of the background noise, speak
louder.
If the HFL does not recognize a
command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’
If it doesn’t recognize the
command a second time, its
response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
doesn’t recognize the command a
third time, it plays the Help
prompt.
If the microphone picks up voices
other than yours, the system may
not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
Lower the A/C fan speed during
voice recognition operation.
Adjust the airflow from both the
dashboard and side vents so they
do not blow against the
microphone on the ceiling.
After pressing the Talk button,
wait for the beep, then give a voice
command.
How to Use the HFL
All phones may not
operate identically, and some
may cause inconsistent operation
of the HFL.
Using Voice Control
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
328
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４８：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When you finish a command
sequence, the HFL goes back to
its main menu. For example, when
you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the
HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been
stored.’’ The next time you press
the Talk button, you will be at the
main menu.
To go back one step in a command
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press
the Back button.
If nothing is said while the HFL is
listening for a command, the HFL
will time out and stop its voice
recognition. The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins listening from the point at
which it timed out.
To end a command sequence at
any time, press and hold the Back
button, or press and release the
Talk button, wait for the beep, and
say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time you
press the Talk button, the HFL
begins from its main menu.
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
To enter a string of numbers in a
Call or Dial command, you can say
them all at once, or you can
separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
10, and 11.
To skip a voice prompt, press the
Talk button while the HFL is
speaking. The HFL will then begin
listening for your next command.
To hear a list of available options
at any time, press the Talk button,
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands
free help.’’
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
329
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４８：２３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
ThevoiceoftheHFLcanbesetto
male or female (U.S. models only).
Also, the incoming notification can
be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no
notification.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
male or female prompts?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or
‘‘Female,’’ depending on the
system voice you want. The HFL
response is, ‘‘Male (Female)
prompts have been selected.
Would you like an audible
notification of an incoming call?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
the notification to be a ring tone or
prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after the
beep, the HFL returns to its main
menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in no
ring tone or prompt playback
during an incoming call. The audio
system will still mute, and a
message will be displayed.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or
‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘A
ring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘An
incoming call prompt will be used.’’
If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you will
hear a ring tone through the audio
speakers to announce an incoming
call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
will hear this message to
announce an incoming call: ‘‘You
have an incoming call.’’
The HFL response continues ‘‘A
security option is available to lock
the HFL system. Each time the
vehicle is turned on, a passcode
would be required to use this
system. Would you like this
security option turned on?’’ If you
say ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set your
passcode. Refer to the setting
procedure in the next column.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To set up the system, do this:
Setting Up the System
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
330
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４８：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The HFL will accept a numeric, four-
digit passcode that you can use for
security purposes.
Follow the system setup
procedure as described previously.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
four-digit number you would like
to set as your passcode?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
passcode you want to use. For
example,say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFL
responseis‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthis
correct?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Security is on.
Each time the vehicle is turned on,
the passcode will be required to
use the system. The system setup
is complete. Returning to the main
menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘Security will not
be used. The system setup is
complete.’’
Once a passcode is set, you can lock
the HFL so it only operates after the
passcode is entered.
The HFL will prompt you for your
passcode each time the ignition
switch is turned to the ON (II)
position and you press the Talk
button. You will only be asked for
thepasscodeonceperignition
cycle. If the passcode is set, its
response is ‘‘The system is locked.
What is the four-digit passcode?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say your four-digit
passcode.Forexample,say‘‘1,2,3,
4.’’
If the passcode is correct, the HFL
response is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If the
passcode is not correct, the HFL
responseis‘‘1,2,3,4isincorrect.
Pleasetryagain.’’Gobacktothe
step 2.
If you forget your passcode and you
cannot activate the HFL, consult
your dealer to cancel the passcode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
To set your passcode, do this:
To enter your passcode, do this;
Setting Your Passcode
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
331
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４８：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your Bluetooth compatible phone
with Hands Free Profile must be
paired to the HFL before you can
make and receive hands-free calls.
To confirm that your phone is
Bluetooth
compatible, visit
, or call (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-
HONDA-9. Your phone retailer
should also be able to confirm that
your phone is Bluetooth
compatible.
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
For pairing, your phone must be in
its Discovery mode.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
The following procedure works for
most phones. If you cannot pair
your phone to the HFL with this
procedure, refer to your phone’s
operating manual, visit
,callthe
Hands Free Link
consumer
support at (888) 528-7876, or call
your phone retailer. In Canada,
call (888) 9-HONDA-9.
During the pairing process, turn
off any previously paired phones
before pairing a new phone.
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Phone setup options
are status, pair, edit, delete, and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The pairing
process requires operation of your
mobile phone. For safety, only
perform this function while the
vehicle is stopped. State a four-
digit code for pairing. Note this
code. It will be requested by the
phone.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the four-digit
code you want to use. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3,4.’’TheHFLresponse
is,‘‘1,2,3,4.Isthiscorrect?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘HFL is now
searching for a Bluetooth phone.
Make sure the phone you are
trying to pair is in discovery mode.’’
Steps 5 and 6 show a
common way to get your phone into
its Discovery mode. If these steps do
not work on your phone, refer to the
phone’s operating manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
handsfreelink.honda.com
handsfreelink.honda.com
Pairing Your Phone
NOTE:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
332
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４８：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you want to pair another phone,
repeat steps 1 through 7.
When asked by the phone, enter
the four-digit code from step 3 into
your phone. The HFL response is
‘‘A new phone has been found.
What would you like to name this
phone?’’
Follow the prompts on your phone
togetitintoitsDiscoverymode.
The phone will search for the HFL.
When it comes up, select
HandsFreeLink from the list of
options displayed on your phone.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to use. For example, say
‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘Eric’s phone has been
successfully paired. Returning to
the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Which phone
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to rename.
For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
new name for Eric’s phone?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new name
of the phone. For example, say
‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘The name has been changed.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Which phone
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name of
the phone you want to delete. For
example say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
to delete Eric’s phone?’’
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
1.
2.
3.
7.
8.
5.
To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
333
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４９：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press and release the Talk button.
If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the
HFL response is ‘‘The phone has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’
or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be
deleted.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the name
of each paired phone. When all
phones paired to the system have
been read, the HFL response is
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An
example of the HFL response is,
‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Battery
strength is three bars. Signal
strength is five bars, and the
phone is roaming. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phone
setup options are status, pair, edit,
delete, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Searching
for the next phone.’’ The HFL
then disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone. If no other phones are
found, the first phone remains
linked.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
delete Eric’s phone. Say OK to
continue, otherwise, say Go back,
or Cancel.’’
1.
2.
1.
4.
5.
1.
2.
To list all paired phones, do this:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone, do this:
To find out the status of the phone being
used, do this:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
334
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４９：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３３９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can make calls using any phone
number, or by using a name in the
HFL phonebook. You can also redial
the last number called. During a call,
theHFLallowsyoutotalkupto30
minutes after you remove the key
from the ignition switch. Continuing
a call without running the engine
may discharge and weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to call. For example, say
‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL response
is ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, or
continue to add numbers.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the
steering wheel volume controls.
To end the call, press the Back
button.
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
You can also make a call directly
from the list shown on the
navigation display.
For more information on how to
make a call, see page .
2.
4.
1.
3.
338
To make a call using a phone number,
do this:
Making a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
335
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４９：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＃
To make a call using a name in the HFL
phonebook, do this:
To send a number during a call, do this:
With your phone on and the
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position, press and release
the Talk button. After the beep,
say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to call/
dial?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to call. For example, say
‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’
To end the call, press the Back
button.
The HFL allows you to send
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system. You can also
program account numbers into the
HFL phonebook for easy retrieval
during menu-driven calls.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number
you want to send. For example,
say‘‘1,2,3.’’TheHFLresponseis
‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue to
add numbers.’’
To redial the last number called by
the phone, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the steering
wheel volume controls.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or
‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you
will hear the person you called
through the audio speakers. To
change the volume, use the audio
system volume knob, or the
steering wheel volume controls.
To send a pound ( ), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
1.
1.2.
3.
4.
2.
Sending Numbers or Names
During a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
336
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４９：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To send a name during a call, do this: To transfer a call from the HFL to your
phone, do this:
To transfer a call from your phone to the
HFL, do this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name or
number would you like to send?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
want to send. For example, say
‘‘Account number.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Would you like to
send account number?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The
dial tones will be sent, and the call
will continue.
If you receive a call when you are not
on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
audio system (if it is on), and plays
the incoming call notification, if
activated. To answer the call, press
the Talk button and begin speaking.
If you don’t want to answer the call,
press the Back button.
If your phone has Call Waiting, and
you receive a call when you are on
the phone, press and release the
Talk button to answer it. When you
do this, the original call is placed on
hold. To return to the original call,
press the Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the new call,
disregard it, and continue with your
original call. If you want to hang up
the original call and answer the new
call, press the Back button.
During a call, you can transfer it
from the HFL to your phone, or from
your phone to the HFL.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from the HFL to the
phone.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The
audio switches from your phone to
the HFL.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dial
tones will be sent, and the call will
continue.
2.
1.
3.
3.
Receiving a Call Transferring a Call
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
337
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４９：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
During a call, you can mute or
unmute your voice to the person you
are talking to.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Mute is
canceled.’’
The HFL phonebook can store up to
50 names with their associated
numbers. These can be any types of
numbers. For example, you can store
a phone number and use it to make a
call, or you can store an account
number and use it during a call to a
menu-driven phone system.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to store?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the
number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
number for account number?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’ Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Eric (or account
number) has been stored.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the number.
For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘123 456
7891. Say enter, or continue to add
numbers.’’
1.
1.2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
To mute your voice, do this:
To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:
Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
338
０７／０９／０３ ２０：４９：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To edit the number of a name, do this:
To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do
this:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to edit?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to edit. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘What is the new number for
Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘The number has
been changed. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘What name
would you like to delete?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘The name has
been deleted. Returning to the
main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘The
Phonebook options are store, edit,
delete, receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the new
number for Eric. For example, say
‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ Say ‘‘Enter.’’ or
continue to add numbers.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to delete. For example,
say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook in the
order which they were stored.
When the end of the list is
reached, the HFL response is,
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
2.
1.
3.
3.
2.
1.
4.
5. 4.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
339
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５０：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To call a name from the phonebook list,
do this:
handsfreelink.
honda.com
To store a phone number from your
phone:
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’
The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebook
options are store, edit, delete,
receive contact, and list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The
HFL responds by listing the
names in the phonebook. When it
saysthenameyouwanttocall,for
example, Eric, press the Talk
button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
to call Eric?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once
connected, you will hear the
person you called through the
audio speakers. To change the
volume, use the audio system
volume knob, or the steering
wheel volume controls.
You can store the desired number to
the HFL phonebook directly from
your cellular phone.
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit
, or call the Hands Free
Link
consumer support at (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-
HONDA-9. You can see your phone’s
owner’s manual for information.
With your phone on and the
ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position, press and release the
Talk button. After the beep, say
‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL response
is, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,
edit, delete, receive contact and
list.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Receive
contact.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘The receive process requires
operation of your mobile phone.
For safety, only perform this
function while the vehicle is
stopped. HFL is now waiting to
receive a contact from a Bluetooth
device.’’
Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number? To discard
this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’
1.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
Storing a Phone Number Directly
from Your Phone
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
340
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５０：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Neil at work will be
stored.Isthiscorrect?’’
If you want to continue to store
any other numbers, press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘HFL is now waiting
to receive a contact from a
Bluetooth device.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say the name you
would like to store. For example,
say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Susan at work will be
stored.Isthiscorrect?’’
Select a desired number from the
list on your phone, and transmit/
send (individual steps will vary for
each type of phone, refer to your
phone’s owner’s manual) via
Bluetooth. The HFL response is
‘‘One phone number has been
received for this contact. What
name would you like to store for
the mobile number? To discard
this number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’
If you do not want to continue to
store any other numbers, press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘Returning to the main
menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘Neil
at work has been stored. If more
than one number was received for
the contact entry, the HFL asks
for the name of the next number.
If only one number is received, or
all numbers have been stored, the
HFL response is, ‘‘Would you like
HFL to receive another contact?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or
‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susan
at work has been stored. Would
you like HFL to receive another
contact?’’
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
341
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５０：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To use the cellular phonebook with
the HFL, say or select ‘‘Cellular
Phonebook’’ from the Information
screen. The navigation display will
change as shown above.
PIN Number. This option allows you
to add, change, or remove a PIN
number for any phonebook that has
been imported.
Import Cellular Phonebook: This
option allows you to store the
phonebook of your cellular phone in
the HFL. When you link your phone
to the HFL and select this option, the
system will start importing and
loading the phonebook.
If any phonebook is not stored and
your phone is not linked to the HFL,
Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.
The cellular phonebook option
allows you to store up to 1,000 names
and 10,000 phone numbers in the
phonebook of Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink from your cellular
phonebook. The maximum names
and numbers to be stored varies on
the data size. With the HFL, you can
then automatically dial any name or
number in the phonebook.
NOTE: Your phone may not have
this capability. Visit
, or call the Hands Free
Link
consumer support at (888)
528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-
HONDA-9. You can see your phone’s
owner’s manual for information.
handsfreelink.
honda.com
Cellular Phonebook Options
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
342
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５０：２３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Search Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to search the
phone numbers stored in the HFL.
When you enter a keyword for a
person’s name, such as the first
name or last name, the system will
find the number you want and let
you make calls.
Delete Imported Phonebook: This
option allows you to delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL. When you
link your phone to the HFL and
select this option, the system will
automatically delete the phonebook
of the linked phone from the HFL
(see page ).
HFL does not allow you to pair
your phone if the vehicle is
moving.
Up to six phones can be paired to
the HFL.
For information on linking to the
HFL, see page .
You can import the phonebook of
your cellular phone into the HFL.
Link your phone to the HFL, and
select ‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
When the message ‘‘The import was
successful.’’ is displayed, touch the
screen to select ‘‘OK.’’
346
332
To import the cellular phonebook
CONTINUED
NOTE:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
343
Example
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５０：３２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To search the imported phonebook
Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
The system will display a list of
person’s names, with the closest
match to the name you entered at
the top of the list.
You can search the stored number
by entering keywords.
Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.
Enter the PIN number. You cannot
access a PIN protected phonebook if
you do not use the correct PIN
number.
Enter the keyword for a person’s
name, such as the first name or last
name, using the joystick. If the
system does not find an exact match,
say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finish
entering the keyword.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
344
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５０：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３４９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−Select the number (1 6) of the
desired person from the list.
Up to three category icons are
displayed in the right side of the list.
These category icons indicate how
many numbers are stored for the
person. If a name has more than
threecategoryicons,‘‘ ’’is
displayed.
The following category icons will
appear:
Select the desired number from the
list to make a call.
After selecting a person, the system
will display a list of the person’s
phone numbers.
Select the desired number from the
list to store it in the HFL.
Say or select ‘‘STORE IN
HandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select a
number to call’’ screen. The screen
shown above will appear.
···
To store an imported phonebook
number
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
345
Work
Home
Preference
Mobile
Pager
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５０：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To delete the imported phonebook
You can delete the stored
phonebook from the HFL.
Link your phone to the HFL and
select ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’
from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.
The display will change as shown
above.
Select a phonebook from the
displayed list. If the phonebook you
select has a PIN icon, you will need
the 4-digit PIN number to access the
phonebook. The following screen
will appear.
After you enter the correct PIN
number, or if the phonebook you
select is not PIN protected, the
following screen appears.
Enter the PIN number to access the
phonebook. You cannot access a PIN
protected phonebook if you do not
use the correct PIN number.
Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message
‘‘The imported phonebook has been
deleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
complete the deletion.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
346
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To add, change, or remove a PIN
number from any phonebook
To add a PIN number
You can add, change or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.
Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the
‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. The
display will change as shown above.
Select the phonebook you wish to
add the PIN number to. The
phonebook you select cannot
already have a PIN icon. The
display will change as shown
above.
Enter the 4-digit PIN number. You
will be asked to re-enter the PIN to
verify.
1. 2.
CONTINUED
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
347
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To change a PIN number
Select the phonebook you wish to
change the PIN number for. The
display will change as shown
above.
Enter your current PIN number. Enter your new 4-digit PIN
number. You will be asked to re-
enter the PIN to verify.
1. 2. 3.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
348
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：１４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This operation clears the HFL of
your passcode, your paired phones,
all names in the HFL phonebook,
and all imported phonebooks.
Clearing is recommended before you
sell your vehicle.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘System options
are setup and clear.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘This process
will clear all paired phones, clear
all entries in the phonebook, and
clear the passcode. Is this what
you would like to do?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Preparing to
clear all paired phones, all
phonebook entries, and the
passcode. This may take up to 2
minutes to complete.’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say
‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’
If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
period of time, the HFL response
is, ‘‘System has been cleared.
Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Change
language.’’ The HFL response is
‘‘English or French?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘Vous avez
selectionne Français. Les noms
enregistres en mode Anglais ne
seront pas accessible en mode
Français. Voulez-vous continuer?
You have selected French. Name
tags that were stored while in
English mode will not be
accessible in French mode. Would
you like to continue? ’’
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
To clear the system, do this:
Canadian models only
To change from English to French, do
this:
CONTINUED
Clearing the System Changing Language
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
349
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：２４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＜＞
＜
＞
If there are paired phones
without French name tags, the
following prompts will continue.
If there are paired phones without
French name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘Pour que le système
identifie les téléphones qui ont été
jumelés dans une autre langue, les
noms des téléphones doivent être
ré-enregistrés.’’
The HFL response is, for example,
‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour
Paul’s phone ?’’ Press and
release the Talk button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est le
nom Français pour Pat’s
phone ?’’ Press and release the
Talk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone de
Pat.’’ After all paired phones
missing a French name tag are re-
recorded, the HFL will prompt,
‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Changer
Langue.’’ The HFL response is,
‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ The
HFL response is, ‘‘You have
selected English. Name tags that
were stored while in French mode
will not be accessible in English
mode. Would you like to
continue?’’, then the system
repeats the response in English.
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’
If there are no paired phones
without French name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Venillez
attendre que le systeme change de
langue. Please wait while the
language is changed.’’ ‘‘La langue
a ete changee. Retour au menu
principal.’’
3. 4.
1.
2.
To change from French to English, do
this:
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
350
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＜＞
＜
＞
If there are paired phones
without English name tags, the
following prompts will continue.
If there are paired phones without
English name tags, the HFL
response is ‘‘The language has
been changed. For the system to
identify phones that were paired
while in another language, the
phone names need to be re-
recorded.’’
The HFL says, for example, ‘‘What
is the English name for
Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Press
and release the Talk button. After
the beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘What is the
English name for Téléphone de
Pat ?’’ Press and release the Talk
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’s
phone.’’ After all paired phones
missing an English name tag are
re-recorded, the HFL will say
‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’
Press and release the Talk button.
After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’
If there are no paired phones
without English name tags, the
HFL response is ‘‘Please wait
while the language is changed.
Venillez attendre que le systeme
change de langue.’’ ‘‘The language
has been changed. Returning to
the main menu.’’
3. 4.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Features
351
NOTE:
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：３６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
All obstacles may not always be
sensed. Even when the system is on,
you should look for obstacles near
yourvehicletomakesureitissafeto
park.
Your vehicle has a parking sensor
system. The system lets you know
theapproximatedistancebetween
your vehicle and most obstacles
while you are parking. When the
system is on and your vehicle is
nearinganobstacle,youwillheara
beeper and see system messages on
the multi-information display.
To activate the system, push the
switch on the dashboard with the
ignition in the ON (II) position. The
indicator in the switch comes on
when the system is on. To turn the
system off, push the switch again.
The system has two front corner
sensors, two rear corner sensors,
and a rear center sensor.
The rear center sensors work when
the shift lever is in reverse (R), and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The corner sensors work only when
the shift lever is in any position other
than P and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
On Touring models
Parking Sensor System
352
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM SWITCH
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle
When you turn the system on, all
indicators will appear on the multi-
information display, and a beeper
sounds once.
When the system senses an obstacle,
the appropriate indicator comes on,
and a beeper sounds as shown in the
following tables.
Distance
Beeper
About 16-20 in
(40-50 cm)
About 12-16 in
(30-40 cm)
Upper left
indicator stays on
Short beeps
Continuous
beep
Very short beeps
About 12 in
(30 cm) or less
Upper left
indicator stays on
Upper left
indicator stays on
Indicator
CONTINUED
Corner Sensor Operation
Multi-Inf ormation Display
Messages and Beeper Operation
Parking Sensor System
Features
353
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５１：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the system develops a problem,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKING
SENSOR SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display, and a
beeper sounds continuously. Very
often, a sensor covered with mud, ice,
snow,etc.isthecauseofthis
message. Check the sensors first. If
the message stays on or the beeper
does not stop, have the system
checked by your dealer.
Distance
Beeper Short beeps
Continuous
beeps
Very short beeps
Bottom
indicator stays on
About 40-70 in
(1-1.8 m)
About 24-40 in
(0.6-1 m)
About 24 in
(0.6 m) or less
Bottom
indicator stays on
Bottom
indicator stays on
Indicator
Rear Center Sensor Operation
Parking Sensor System
354
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３５９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The range of the corner sensors and
the rear center sensor are limited.
Each corner sensor is capable of
sensing an obstacle only when your
vehicleis20in(50cm)orcloser.
The rear center sensor senses an
obstacle that is behind your vehicle
70 in (1.8 m) or closer.
Do not put any accessories on or
around the sensors.
The system may not function
properly under these conditions:
The sensors are covered with
snow,ice,mud,etc.
When the vehicle is on a rough
road, on grass, or on a hill.
After the vehicle has been sitting
out in hot or cold weather.
When the system is affected by
some electrical equipment or
devices generating an ultrasonic
wave.
When operating the vehicle in bad
weather.
The system may not sense thin or
low objects, or sonic-absorptive
materials such as snow, cotton, or
sponge.
The system cannot sense objects
directly under the bumper.
Canadian Owners:
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Parking Sensor System
Features
355
Within about 20 in (50 cm) Within about 70 in (1.8 m)
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
▼
▲
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen. On
vehicle without navigation system,
the rear view is shown on the left
side of the inside mirror.
When in reverse, the touch screen
and navigation system ‘‘hard’’
buttons are locked out, except the
‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘ ’’
or ‘‘ ’’ button allows you to adjust
the brightness of the rearview
camera image.
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
On EX-L and Touring models On U.S. EX-L with navigation system
and Touring models
Rearview Camera and Monitor
356
ZOOM BUTTON
The camera brightness cannot be
adjusted by voice control.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can turn the monitor on and off
by pressing the monitor off button
when the shift lever is in reverse.
The monitor turns on everytime you
shift to reverse, even if you turned it
off the last time.
Monitor brightness is adjusted
automatically by sensors. If you use
the monitor continuously at high
temperature, the monitor will
gradually dim.
If a bright light (such as sunlight) is
shining on the inside mirror, the
image may be difficult to see.
The inside mirror will be hot when
you use the monitor for an extended
period of time.
On U.S. EX-L without navigation system
and Canadian EX-L models
Rearview Camera and Monitor
Features
357
REAR VIEW MONITOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
MONITOR OFF BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：２５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
358
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
..............................Break-in period . 360
.................Fuel Recommendation . 360
.........Service Station Procedures . 361
....................................Refueling . 361
Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 362
...................................Oil Check . 363
.............Engine Coolant Check . 364
...............................Fuel Economy . 365
...Accessories and Modifications . 368
.............................Carrying Cargo . 370
Before Driving
Before Driving
359
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６４
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Do not tow a trailer.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
360
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Before refueling, make sure the rear
sliding door on the driver’s side is
closed.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Refueling
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
361
FUEL FILL CAP
Pull
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
TETHER
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５２：５１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even
though the tank is not full, there may
be a problem with your vehicle’s fuel
vapor recovery system. The system
helps keep fuel vapor from going
into the atmosphere. Try filling at
another pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN
FUEL CAP’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page
).
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display (see page ).
1.
6.
5.4.
80
92
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
On Touring models
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
362
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Pull
０７／１１／０８ １９：１８：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Park the vehicle on a level surface.Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood. The hood latch
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull
this handle until it releases the
hood, then lift the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
1.
3.
2.
3.
2.
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Before Driving
363
DIPSTICK
SUPPORT ROD
GRIP
LATCH
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５３：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
4.
418
422
415
Service Station Procedures
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Adding
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant Check
Adding Engine Oil
364
MAX RESERVE TANK
MIN
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５３：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３６９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
pergallon(basedonEPAfuelcost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada: Visit
)
Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shownintheexampletotheright
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
www.
fueleconomy.gov www.
vehicles.gc.ca
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
City MPG
Combined Fuel Economy
Highway MPG
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
365
Combined Fuel
Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
City MPG
Highway MPG
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５３：２７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
aremoreefficientwhenwarmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
An under-inflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multi-
information display (see
on page ).
For example:
Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
415
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
).
Maintain proper tire inflation
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Avoid excessive idling
Always drive in the highest gear
possible
Observe the speed limit
Drive moderately
418
Drive Efficiently
Vehicle Maintenance
Fuel Economy
366
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５３：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Reset trip counter to zero.
Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
Follow one of the simple calculations above.
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Calculating Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system
Plan and combine trips
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
367
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Kilometers
Lper
100 km
Liter
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５３：４９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
theseareasmayinterferewith
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
474
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
368
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５３：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety systems could make the
systems ineffective.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Herearesomeexamples:
Lowering the vehicle with a non-
Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
369
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５４：０４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box (upper and lower)
In-floor storage
Front door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second row seats when removed,
andthethirdrowseatwhenfolded
flat
Second row console
Center pocket
Rear compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
: If equipped
Carrying Cargo
370
REAR COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET
CENTER
POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
UPPER GLOVE BOX
CARGO AREA LOWER GLOVE BOX
SECOND ROW CONSOLE
IN-FLOOR STORAGE
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５４：１４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−×
−
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle
is:
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Label Example
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(5)
(4)
Canadian LX and EX models:
1,388 lbs (630 kg)
EX-L and Touring models:
1,322 lbs (600 kg)
U.S. LX and Canadian DX models:
1,349 lbs (612 kg)
CONTINUED
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
371
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
０７／１１／０８ １９：１８：５６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
areonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
MaxloadonEX-LandTouringmodelsisusedintheExamples.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Carrying Cargo
372
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
Max Load (1,322 lbs)
Max Load (1,322 lbs)
Max Load (1,322 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(1,022 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(722 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(572 lbs)
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５４：３８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the pedals, the seat operation, or
the proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
Keep the glove boxes closed while
driving. If either are open, a
passenger could be injured during
a crash or sudden stop.
If you remove or fold the rear seats
down, tie down items that could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep all
cargo below the bottom of the
windows. If it is higher than the
windows, it could interfere with the
proper operation of the side curtain
airbags.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .60
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Before Driving
373
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５４：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The grocery bag hooks on the back
of the third row seats are designed
to hold plastic grocery bags
containing lightweight items. Heavy
objects may damage the hooks.
If you place items near the rear
windows, be sure they are below
the bottom of the windows. If
cargo is higher, it could interfere
with proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed 150 lb (68 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Grocery Bag Hooks
Carrying Cargo
374
GROCERY BAG HOOKS
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５４：５１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３７９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the vehicle stability assist
system, the tire pressure monitoring
system, and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 376
.......................Starting the Engine . 377
..............Automatic Transmission . 378
...........................................Parking . 382
.............................Braking System . 383
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 384
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
........................................System . 386
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
......................................(TPMS) . 388
...........................Towing a Trailer . 396
...................Towing Your Vehicle . 403
Driving
Driving
375
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５４：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８０
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages in the information
display or multi-information
display (depending on models)
(seepages,,,and
).3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
15
65 66 77
87
443
169
190
141
Preparing to Drive
376
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５５：０５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
5.
6.1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting the Engine
Driving
377
Immobilizer System
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. See
on page .143
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５５：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and press
the release button on the side of the
shiftlever.Youcannotshiftoutof
Park when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
).88
On Touring models
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
378
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
D3 BUTTON
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５５：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the side of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestopandthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
381
CONTINUED
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoN
NtoD
RtoN
DtoD
DtoD
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
Press the D button.
3
3
3
3
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Neutral (N)
Reverse (R)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
379
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５５：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
−
−
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
This position locks
thetransmissioninsecondgear.It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
Use this position for
normal driving. The transmission
automatically selects a suitable gear
for your speed and acceleration.
To use D , press the
D button when the shift lever is in
the ‘‘D’’ position. This position is simi-
lartoD,exceptonlythefirstthree
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
3
3
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter
Second (2)Drive (D)
Drive (D )
First (1)
3
380
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５５：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Set the parking brake.
Putaclothonthenotchofthe
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the left side. Press the
brake pedal, and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
5.
6.4.
1.
2.
3.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Driving
381
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５５：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Turn off the lights.
Parking Tips
Parking
382
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５５：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness
and reduces brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Braking System
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Driving
383
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５６：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
89
You should never pump the brake pedal.
On Touring models
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
384
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５６：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３８９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
If this happens, you will also see
‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and
‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’
messages on the multi-information
display.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
473
On Touring models
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
Driving
385
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５６：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink (see
page ).
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
If the VSA system indicator comes
on while driving, pull to the side of
theroadwhenitissafe,andturnoff
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it does not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
The VSA system automatically turns
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, see
page .
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, see page .
Or, if the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message with the
indicator flashing, see page .
In this case, you cannot turn off the
VSA using the OFF switch again.
70
88
388
391
On Touring models only
Except Touring models
Touring model
VSA Activation Indicator
VSA System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
386
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５６：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the VSA system on
and off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
447
VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
Driving
387
EX-L and
Touring models
VSA OFF
SWITCH
VSA OFF SWITCH
LX, DX and EX models
０７／１１／０８ １９：１９：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
457
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Except Touring models
388
０７／１１／０８ １９：１９：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page ).
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
391
442
443
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Except Touring models
Driving
389
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５６：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Each wheel (except the compact
sparetirewheel)isequippedwitha
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
thecompactsparetire,thelowtire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
457
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Except Touring models
390
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５７：０２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator in the
instrumental panel and the
appropriate tire position indicator on
thetirepressuremonitoronthe
multi-information display (see page
)tocomeon.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if
youcheckandadjustyourtire
pressure in cooler conditions, and
drive into extremely hot conditions,
the tire may become overinflated.
However, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator will not come on if
the tires are overinflated.
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
The multi-information display also
shows a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message (see page ). You should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure as indicated on the
vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
393
442
395
393
CONTINUED
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
Driving
391
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５７：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when the
vehicle is cold, and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as
specified on the vehicle placard and
intheowner’smanual(seepage
).
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly to the station, then
inflate the tire to the recommended
pressure.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS and tire monitor
indicators will come on. Replace the
indicated flat tire with the compact
sparetire(seepage ).
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
correct.
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.
458
443
457
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
392
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５７：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
When all tire pressures are normal,
the tire pressure monitor will show a
‘‘TIRE PRESS. OK SYSTEM FUNC
NORMAL’’ message.
To display the tire pressure monitor,
press the INFO button until it
appears on the multi-information
display.
When the TPMS is functioning
normally, you can see the tire
pressure readings of each tire in psi
(U.S. models) or kPa (Canadian
models) by pressing the SEL/
RESET button while the multi-
information display shows the tire
pressure monitor.
When any of the tires have low
pressure, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator on the instrument
panel comes on, and the multi-
information display also interrupts
the current display and shows a
‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’
message. You can see one or more of
the low pressure tire positions
highlighted in the display along with
this message.
On Touring models
Tire Pressure Monitor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
Driving
393
U.S. EX-L model is shown.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５７：２６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
It is possible that the pressures
shown on the multi-information
display and the pressures you
manually measure are slightly
different.
If the difference is significant or you
cannot make the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator and message on the
multi-information display go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Because your vehicle is equipped
with the Michelin PAX system, you
can continue to drive up to about 125
miles (200 km). If you have a flat tire,
take your vehicle to the nearest
Honda dealer or authorized Michelin
PAX system dealer.
The tires on your vehicles are PAX
tires, and you cannot replace or
repair a flat tire. Replacement or
repair of tires must be performed by
a Honda dealer or an authorized
Michelin PAX system dealer.
For more information on the
Michelin PAX system, refer to page
.
If a flat tire is causing the low tire
pressure indicator to come on, you
will see the above message on the
multi-information display.
454
On U.S. models with the Michelin PAX
system
Pax System Warning
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
394
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５７：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０３９９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you see this message, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. Also,
the tire pressure readings will not be
displayed. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multi-
information display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
the multi-information display shows
a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message.
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page ).
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
71
387
Check TPMS System Message
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models
Driving
395
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５７：４１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４００
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
depends on several factors. See page
for the driving limits for your
towing situation. Towing a load that
is too heavy can seriously affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance.
It can also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
Theweightthatthe
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight. Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
397
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
Towing a Trailer
396
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５７：４７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Equipped with transmission cooler
and power steering fluid cooler
3,500 lbs (1,580 kg)
3,350 lbs (1,520 kg)
3,200 lbs (1,450 kg)
3,050 lbs (1,380 kg)
2,900 lbs (1,310 kg)
2,750 lbs (1,250 kg)
2,600 lbs (1,180 kg) 1,550 lbs (700 kg)
650 lbs (290 kg)
Including driver. Based on 150 lbs (70 kg) per occupant.
See page for information about fluid coolers.
Number of
Occupants
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1:
2:
3:
4:
399
U.S. LX and Canadian DX models
EX, EX-L, Touring and Canadian LX models
2
34
1
3
4
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not exceed
2,910 lbs (1,320 kg) on the front axle,
and 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg) on the rear
axle.
The maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer is
8,410 lbs (3,815 kg).
To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the
front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear, then re-adjust the load as needed.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 6,019 lbs
(2,730 kg).
Towing a Trailer
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR):
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Driving
397
０７／１１／０８ １９：１９：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
If you cannot get to a public scale,
you can estimate the total trailer
weight by adding the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the
manufacturer) with everything in or
on the trailer.
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment,
depending on the size of your trailer,
how much load you are towing, and
where you tow. To ensure the best
quality, we recommend that you
purchase Honda equipment
whenever possible.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and meets federal, state,
province, and local regulations.
If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Checking Loads Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing a Trailer
398
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody,
using the six threaded holes
provided. A hitch and the required
fluid coolers designed especially for
your Odyssey can be obtained from
your Honda dealer.
If the total trailer weight is more
than 1,850 lbs (840 kg), you must
also use a weight distributing hitch.
This device transfers weight from
the vehicle’s rear wheels to the front
wheels, and to the trailer’s wheels.
Carefully follow the hitch maker’s
instructions for proper installation
and adjustment.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
If the total trailer weight exceeds
2,000 lbs (900 kg), you should install
a sway control device to minimize
swaying that can occur in crosswinds
and in normal and emergency
driving maneuvers. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
To help prevent overheating, a
transmission fluid cooler and a
power steering fluid cooler are
required for trailer towing. These
coolers are available only from your
Honda dealer.
Hitches
Weight Distributing Hitch
Safety Chains Sway Control
Transmission Fluid Cooler and
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Towing a Trailer
Driving
399
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋＋
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicles hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Seeyourtrailerdealerorrental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check the
requirements for the areas where
you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector behind the right side
panel in the cargo area. Refer to the
drawing above for the purpose of
each pin.
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
400
GROUND
SMALL LIGHTS
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
RIGHT TURN
SIGNAL
SMALL LIGHTS
B HACB HAZARD
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. If you use the compact
sparetirethatcamewithyour
vehicle, it could adversely affect
vehicle handling. See page for
proper tire size, page for how to
store a full size wheel and tire, and
page for information on
changing a flat tire.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
Because of the Michelin PAX system,
you must not change a flat tire, or
use a compact spare tire on your
vehicle.
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page ).
447
463
458
360
If equipped
Spare Tires Additional Towing Equipment
Break-In Period
Towing a Trailer
Driving
401
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：２４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. Do not exceed
55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds,
the trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension,
cooling system, and lights are in
good operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
You may want to fill the fuel tank
with premium fuel. Premium fuel
provides improved performance.
Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Towing a Trailer
402
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page .480
3
bottom
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Backing Up
Parking
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle
Towing Your Vehicle
Driving
403
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
404
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：４７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４０９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models), and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
......................Maintenance Safety . 406
....................Maintenance Minder . 407
..............................Fluid Locations . 417
........................Adding Engine Oil . 418
Changing the Engine Oil and
...........................................Filter . 420
..............................Engine Coolant . 422
....................Windshield Washers . 424
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 425
....................................Brake Fluid . 427
....................Power Steering Fluid . 428
....................................Timing Belt . 428
.............................................Lights . 429
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 436
.....................................Floor Mats . 436
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 436
.................................Wiper Blades . 437
...........................................Wheels . 442
...............................................Tires . 442
...................Checking the Battery . 450
.............................Vehicle Storage . 451
505
Maintenance
Maintenance
405
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５８：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１０
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Burns from hot parts.
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
406
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５９：０２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display (LX, EX,
EX-L and Canadian DX models), or
on the multi-information display
(Touring models), to show you when
you should have your dealer perform
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
If the oil life is 15 percent or less,
you will see the oil life indicator for
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. This
indicator stays on until you cancel it
by pressing the select/reset knob.
The maintenance minder indicator
will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and push and release
the select/reset knob on the
instrument panel repeatedly, until
the engine oil life is displayed.
CONTINUED
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Indicator
Maintenance
407
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
０７／１１／０８ １９：２７：２０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can change the display to the
odometer, the trip meter, or the
outside temperature by pushing the
select/reset knob on the instrument
panel.
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see a
‘‘CHANGE OIL’’ message on the
information display, along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, you will see the above
display. In this display, the remaining
oil life indicator will be blinking. This
display comes on and stays on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position. When you see
this message, have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer as soon as possible.
Maintenance Minder
408
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５９：１４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
CONTINUED
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 percent or less, the display shows
a ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) for other scheduled
maintenance items needing service.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the system
message indicator will also come on.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then push and release
the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel repeatedly, until the
engine oil life is displayed.
If you still do not perform the
indicated maintenance, you will see a
negative mileage, for example
‘‘ 543,’’ blinking in the display. This
negative mileage means that you
should have performed the indicated
maintenance 543 miles ago.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenancedonebyyourdealer.
On Touring models
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
409
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５９：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
These messages will come on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page .
You can change the display to the
odometer, the trip meter, or the
outside temperature by pushing the
SEL/RESET button on the steering
wheel.
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 0 percent and you have not
done the required maintenance, you
will see the above display for several
seconds. In this display, ‘‘0’’ will be
blinking.
The display then changes to
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE.’’
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see the
above display. The display then
changes to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’
Have the indicated maintenance
done as soon as possible.
413
Maintenance Minder
410
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５９：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
All the maintenance items displayed
on the information display or the
multi-information display are in code.
If you still do not get the indicated
maintenance done, you will see a
negative mileage, for example ‘‘ 15’’
blinking. This negative mileage
display means you should have done
the indicated maintenance 15 miles
ago. Immediately have the indicated
maintenancedonebyyourdealer.
For an explanation of the
maintenance codes, see page .416
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Maintenance
411
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE
MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEMS
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
Touring modelsExcept Touring models
０７／１１／０８ １９：２７：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life indicator and the maintenance
item code(s) will blink.
Press the select/reset knob for
more than 5 seconds. The
maintenance items code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
indicator will reset to ‘‘100.’’
Press the select/reset knob until
the engine oil life indicator is
displayed.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
3. 4.
1.
2.
On LX, EX, EX-L and Canadian DX
models
Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Indicator
412
０７／１１／０８ １９：２７：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the SEL/RESET button on
the steering wheel. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
If you want to cancel resetting,
presstheINFObuttononthe
steering wheel. The display
changesasshown.PresstheSEL/
RESET button. This cancels the
resetting procedure, and the
screen returns to the normal
display mode.
Press the SEL/RESET button on
the steering wheel for about 10
seconds. The display will change
to the ‘‘CUSTOM SETUP’’ mode.
Press the SEL/RESET button on
the steering wheel until you see
the engine oil life display.
3.
1.
2.
4.
5.
CONTINUED
On Touring models
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
413
０７／０９／０３ ２０：５９：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
When you select ‘‘RESET’’ and
press the SEL/RESET button, the
multi-information display resets as
shown above.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
6.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
414
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４１９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
U.S. Vehicles:
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the odometer/
trip meter display or the multi-
information display.
363
364
425
427
429
442
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
415
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
＃
＃
−
−
＃
＊
Maintenance Minder
416
:
If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
NOTE:
1:
415
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under 20°F,
29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km
(Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
A
B
Symbol Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
Maintenance Minder
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
417
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Adding Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
418
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the odometer/
trip meter display or on the multi-
information display.
Your vehicle’s engine does not
require any oil additives. Additives
may adversely affect engine or
transmission performance and
durability.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Adding Engine Oil
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Maintenance
419
Ambient Temperature
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the odometer/
trip meter display or on the multi-
information display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can dam-
age your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
1.
2.
3.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
420
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
OIL FILTER
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
421
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
422
RESERVE TANK
MAX
MIN
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：００：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill. Clean
up any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
423
RADIATOR CAP
FILLER NECK
Fill up to here
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０１：０６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use. This
reservoir supplies the windshield and
rear window washers.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge attached to the cap.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘WASHER
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
89
74
On Canadian models:
On Canadian Touring model:
Windshield Washers
424
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０１：１４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４２９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick, and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
1.
2. 3.
4.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
425
DIPSTICK
HOT
MARK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０１：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
tube to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks on the dipstick.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is indicated on a maintenance
message on the information display
or on the multi-information display
(depending on models).
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
5. 6.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
426
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
not mix with other transmission fluids.
Using transmission fluid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting from the use of
transmission fluid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０１：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,
independent of mileage.
Brake Fluid
Maintenance
427
MAX
MIN
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０１：３５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km) if you regularly drive
your vehicle in one or more of these
conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spill
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Power Steering Fluid Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
428
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０１：４３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs, two on each side. When
replacing a bulb, handle it by its base
and protect the glass from contact
with your skin or hard objects. If you
touch the glass, clean it with
denaturedalcoholandacleancloth.
The high beam headlight bulb and
the low beam headlight bulb are
replaced the same way.
Open the hood. To change the
high beam headlight bulb on the
passenger’s side, remove the
power steering fluid reservoir
from its holder by pulling it
straight up.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustmentsshouldbedonebyyour
dealer or other qualified technician.
1.
CONTINUED
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Maintenance
429
POWER
STEERING
FLUID
RESERVOIR
Passenger’s side
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０１：５１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Open the hood. Remove the
socket from the headlight
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
If you replaced the high beam
headlight bulb on the passenger’s
side, reinstall the power steering
fluid reservoir.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
5.
6.
7.
2.
3.
4.
2.
1.
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Bulb
430
TAB
BULB
CONNECTOR
BULB SOCKET
Driver’s side
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０２：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Open the hood. Remove the
socket from the headlight
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Lights
Replacing a Front Parking/Side
Marker Bulb
Maintenance
431
BULB
SOCKET
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０２：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb from the fog
light assembly by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
Insert the new bulb into the
assembly and turn it one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw.
Remove the fog light assembly
from the bumper by pulling its
inner edge first, then the whole
assembly out of the bumper.
Reinstall the fog light assembly,
then tighten the screw.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Touring models only
Lights
ReplacingaFogLightBulb
432
TAB
BULB
CONNECTOR
SCREW
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,
perspiration, or a scratch on the glass
can cause the bulb to overheat and
shatter.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０２：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Open the tailgate.
Install the rear light assembly in
the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts. Snap the bolt covers into
position.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Remove the two bolt covers on the
rear pillar by prying on the bottom
edge with a flat-tip screwdriver.
Remove the bolts with a Phillips-
head screwdriver, and remove the
light assembly from the rear pillar.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its socket.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: turn signal or
brake/taillight.2.
3.
5.
6.
1.
4.
7.
8.
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs (in Rear
Pillar)
Maintenance
433
COVER
BOLTS
BULBS
SOCKETS
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０２：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the light assembly
cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying in the notch on its
middle edge with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: taillight or back-up
light.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Reinstall the light assembly cover.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.
6.
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Tailgate)
434
COVER
BULBS
SOCKETS
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０２：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４３９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Remove the two screw covers on
the light assembly by prying on
the side edge with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
Remove the screws with a Phillips-
head screwdriver, then remove
the light assembly from the
tailgate.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Press the brake pedal to make
sure the new bulb is working.
Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Reinstall the high-mount brake
light assembly into the tailgate.
Tighten the two screws and
reinstall the covers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Maintenance
435
SCREWS
BULB
SOCKETCOVER
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０２：４７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
make sure to re-anchor it when you
putitbackinyourvehicle.
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
canbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mat.
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the climate control
system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
odometer/trip meter display or on
the multi-information display. It
should be replaced every 15,000
miles (24,000 km) if you drive
primarily in urban areas that have
high concentrations of soot in the air,
or if the flow from the climate
control system becomes less than
usual.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
436
LOOP
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０２：５６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Put a cloth on the edge of the lock
tab, then push up on the lock tab
carefully with a flat-tip screwdriver.
To replace a front wiper blade: 2.
1.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
437
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the arms.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０３：０４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pivot the blade assembly toward
the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
3.
4.
Wiper Blades
438
BLADE
WIPER ARM
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０３：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Push down
the lock tab. Make sure the wiper
blade assembly locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Make sure the tab on the blade
assembly fits in the indent of the
wiper blade and the blade is
completely installed.
Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
5.
6.
7.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
439
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE
TOP
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０３：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Pull one end of the blade out from
the holder.
Slide the blade out of the holder.
To replace a rear wiper blade:
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pivoting the
blade assembly upward.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
1.
2. 3.
Wiper Blades
440
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０３：２５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Slide the new blade into the wiper
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
Insert both ends of the blade into
the holder. Make sure they are
secure.
Install the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm against the
windshield.
4.
5.
6.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
441
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０３：３１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)willwarnyouwhenatire
pressure is low. See page for
information on the TPMS.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
388
If equipped
Inflation GuidelinesTiresWheels
Wheels, Tires
442
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０３：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshoulduseyourowntire
pressure gauge whenever you check
your tire pressures. This will make it
easier for you to tell if a pressure
loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Tire Size
Tire Size
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
EX-L models
LX, EX and Canadian DX models
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
Maintenance
443
235/65R16 103T
35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm
)
235/65R16 103T
35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
０７／１１／０８ １９：２７：５６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
490
Tire Size
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front:
Rear:
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front:
Rear:
U.S. Touring model with the Michelin
PAX system
Touring model without the Michelin
PAX system
Tires
Tire Inspection
444
INDICATOR
LOCATION
MARKS
TREAD WEAR
INDICATORS
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
235-710R460A
104T 35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm
)
235/60R17 102T
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm
)
35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm
)
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０４：０８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４４９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display or multi-
information display (depending on
models). Move the tires to the
positions shown in the diagram each
time they are rotated. If you
purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See
on page ).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
490
If equipped
Tires
Tire RotationTire MaintenanceTire Service Life
Tire
Labeling
Maintenance
445
Front Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０４：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
Your vehicle is not designed for
Michelin PAX system wheels or tires.
Useonlythewheelsandtires
designated in this owner’s manual.
Never mix conventional wheels or
tires with PAX system wheels or
tires.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Vehicles without the Michelin PAX
system
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels
446
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０４：２５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＋
＃
Wheels: Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
There are no snow tires compatible
with the PAX system.
Tires:
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below.
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
488
490
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1142
Cable-type: SCC SC Cable SC1042
Link-type: Laclede 1142
Cable-type: SCC SC Cable SC1042
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1138
Cable-type: SCC SC Cable SC1038
CONTINUED
On models with the Michelin PAX
system
On models with the Michelin PAX
system
All models except Touring models
All models except Touring models
Touring models without the Michelin
PAX system
Touring models without the Michelin
PAX system
All except Touring models
On models with Michelin PAX system
On Touring models
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specif ications Winter Driving
Snow Tires
Tire Chains
Maintenance
447
16x7J
225 x 460A
235/65R16 103T
235-710R460A 104T
17x7J
235/60R17 102T
(TPMS)
(TPMS)
(TPMS&PAX)
(PAX)
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０４：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Tire chains cannot be used with a
flat front tire. If a front tire goes flat
when a tire chain is installed on it,
remove the chain, and follow the
precautions described under
Michelin PAX System (see page
).
The previously listed chains are the
only ones that have been approved
by Honda for use on your vehicle.
Since Honda cannot test all chains,
you must be personally responsible
for proper selection, installation, and
useoftirechains.
These chains are available at many
auto supply stores. For a complete
list of stores, visit the SCC website at
www.scc-chain.com. When installing
chains, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions, and mount them as
tightlyasyoucan.Driveslowlywith
chains installed.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
youbegindrivingonclearedroads.
454
Tires
448
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０４：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Michelin PAX system which,
together with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS), enables
you to continue driving even if one or
more of your tires loses its pressure.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle
are specially designed for the PAX
system, and the PAX system is
specifically designed and fine-tuned
foryourvehicle.
Because of these reasons, use only
the wheels and tires designated in
this owner’s manual. Never mix PAX
system wheels or tires with
conventional wheels or tires.
There are no snow tires compatible
with the PAX system, and not all tire
chains are suitable for use on the
PAX system tires.
If you mount snow chains on your
tires, use the chains recommended
by Honda (see page ).
Do not replace the PAX system tires
and wheels with conventional tires
andwheels.Doingsowoulddisable
the PAX system and the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
and may void your new vehicle
warranty.
Never use a tire repair agent in a
PAX system tire, and never repair
a PAX system tire by yourself.
Repair or replacement must be
done by a Honda dealer or an
authorized Michelin PAX system
dealer.
If you must continue driving with a
flat tire, follow all the procedures
and precautions described on page
.
447
458
If equipped
Tires
Michelin PAX System
Important Precautions
Maintenance
449
TM
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０４：５４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
450
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：００ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle twice).
Preferably, do this once a month.Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
451
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
452
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
...............Driving with a Flat Tire . 454
.........Michelin
PAX System . 454
......................Compact Spare Tire . 457
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 458
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 465
................................Jump Starting . 467
..............If the Engine Overheats . 469
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 471
..........Charging System Indicator . 471
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 472
...........................Readiness Codes . 472
...............Brake System Indicator . 473
..............................................Fuses . 474
..............................Fuse Locations . 477
......................Emergency Towing . 480
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
453
TM
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：１５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５８
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Michelin PAX system. Since each
Michelin PAX system tire has an
inner support ring that allows it to
continue running without air, it may
be difficult to immediately judge
from its appearance if a tire is
punctured. Your vehicle is also
equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS), and this
system may be your first detection of
a flat tire. The TPMS monitors the air pressure
of all four tires whenever the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. It
will immediately sense if a tire starts
to lose its pressure, and give you
warning with the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator in the instrument
panel and a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multi-
information display. If the indicator
and the warning message do not
come on again after you inflate the
tire to its correct air pressure (see
page ), it was probably a natural
loss of the air pressure and you can
continue driving as before.
If the indicator and the message
come on again, you probably have a
flat tire. In this case, you will see a
‘‘PAX SYSTEM WARNING’’
message on the multi-information
display.
444
If equipped
Driving With a Flat Tire
Michelin PAX System
454
TM
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４５９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
With the PAX system tires, you can
drive up to about 125 miles (200 km)
even if one or more of your tires are
punctured. This allows you to drive
to the nearest Honda dealer or
authorized Michelin PAX system
dealer to have the tire(s) repaired.
If you get a flat tire, never try to
repair it yourself, and never replace a
flat tire with a compact spare tire.
The above message shows that you
are driving your vehicle on a flat tire,
andshouldobservethe‘‘RUNFLAT
DRIVING’’ speed limit of 50 mph
(80 km/h). Drive to your nearest
Honda dealer or authorized Michelin
PAX system dealer, or call the PAX
help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE
(1-877-729-8473).
If the display changes to the above
message, it means that ‘‘RUN FLAT
DRIVING’’ is nearing the limit, and
you have to stop driving soon. Take
your vehicle to the nearest Honda
dealer or authorized Michelin PAX
system dealer as soon as possible.
Follow the instructions shown on the
multi-information display, and drive
very carefully.
CONTINUED
Driving With a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
455
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：２９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you see the above message on the
multi-information display, you have
reached the limit of run flat driving,
and you should stop driving
immediately. Be aware that if you
continue to drive, the noise and
vibration level from the tire will
increase significantly, and the tire
may no longer be repairable.
Stop driving immediately when
you see a ‘‘RUN FLAT LIMIT
STOP DRIVING’’ message on the
multi-information display.
Continuous driving after this
message will make it impossible to
repair the tire.
If you cannot find a Honda dealer or
an authorized Michelin PAX system
dealer where you are driving, call the
PAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE
(1-877-729-8473).
Call a professional towing service
who can transport your vehicle on
flat-bed equipment. Never tow your
vehicle behind another vehicle with a
rope or chain. Flat-bed equipment is
the best way to transport your
vehicle. Your vehicle can also be
towed by wheel-lift equipment with
the wheels off the ground (see page
).
Although your vehicle is capable of
runflatdriving,youshouldalways
observe the following:
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Drive carefully. Your vehicle may
handle differently from when the
tires are properly inflated,
especially when cornering.
In its run flat mode, a PAX system
tire is somewhat noisier than when
it is fully inflated, this is normal.
480
Driving With a Flat Tire
Important Safety Precautions
456
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：３７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire. After several
miles (kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low
tire pressure indicator goes off.
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.
After several miles (kilometers)
driving with the spare, this
indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page ).395
Models without Michelin PAX System
Except Touring models
Touring models
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
457
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：４６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The jack is behind a cover in the
cargo area on the driver’s side,
and tools are on the back of the
cover. Remove the cover by
pushing the tabs down and pulling
the cover out.
Open the tailgate.
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
2.
1. 3.
Models without Michelin PAX System
Changing a Flat Tire
458
JACK
SPARE TIRE
TOOLS
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０５：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Loosen the jack from its holder by
turning the end counterclockwise.
Remove the bracket from the jack
storageareabyunscrewingthe
bracket mounting wing bolt.
Remove the vinyl storage bag.
Move the seat belt out of the way
by hanging the latch plate on the
holder.
Fold down the third row seat (see
page ).
6.
7.
5.4.
181
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
459
VINYL BAG
JACK
COVER
BRACKET MOUNTING
WING BOLT
HOLDER
BRACKET
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０６：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The spare tire is stored behind spare
tire cover on the sidewall of the
cargo area on the driver’s side.
Placethejackunderthejacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Remove the cover by holding the
two handles on the spare tire
cover and pulling the cover out.
If you are changing a rear tire,
close the sliding door.
Unscrew the tire mounting wing
bolt, and take the spare tire out of
its holder.
Make sure you also turn off the
sliding door main switch.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
8.
9.
10. 12.
11.
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Changing a Flat Tire
460
SEAT BELT
COVER
TIRE MOUNTING
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
WHEEL NUTS
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０６：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
13. 14. 15.
CONTINUED
On LX and Canadian DX models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
461
EXTENSION
WHEEL COVER
HUB
WHEEL NUT
WRENCH
０７／１１／０８ １９：２８：０６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
a crisscross pattern. Have the
wheel nut torque checked at the
nearest automotive service facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Put the flat tire in the supplied
vinyl storage bag.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
16.
17.
18. 19.
Changing a Flat Tire
462
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０６：２６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Install the bracket and the bracket
mountingwingboltonthe
attachment point as shown, and
tighten the bolt. Make sure the
bracket is securely tightened.
Install the flat tire on the bracket
with the inside of the wheel facing
toward you. Install the tire
mounting wing bolt to the bracket
through one of the five wheel nut
holes as shown. Poke a hole in the
vinyl bag as needed. Secure the
flat tire by tightening the tire
mounting wing bolt.
Store the jack in its holder. To
store the jack, align the locator
stud in the holder with the hole in
the jack base. Turn the jack’s end
bracket clockwise to lock it in
place. Store the tools in the
holders on the back of the jack
storage cover.
Return the third row seat to an
upright position.
YouwillfindaU-shapedcarpet
piece behind the seat bottom of
the third row seat. Pull up the U-
shaped carpet piece, fold it, and
tack the end under the carpet.
Remove the spacer, and unfasten
the plastic screw with a coin.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
463
BRACKET
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
SPACER
PLASTIC SCREW
BRACKET MOUNTING WING BOLT
ATTACHMENT
POINT
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０６：３４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
You can store the flat tire on the top
of the folded third row seat.
Pull up the U-shaped carpet piece,
fold it, and tack the end under the
carpet.
Remove the spacer, and unfasten
the plastic screw with a coin.
Place the flat tire face down on the
attachment point. Put the spacer
cone on the flat tire as shown.
Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Secure
the flat tire into the attachment
point by tightening the tire
mounting wing bolt through the
center cap hole of the flat tire
wheel.
Follow step 22 through 26 on
pages and .
Store the spacer and the plastic
screw in a noticeable place.
Make sure to reinstall the plastic
screw after the flat tire is repaired
andinstalledonthevehicle.
Store the wheel cover in the spare
tire storage area.
Install the spare tire storage cover.
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire.
Store the spacer, plastic screw and
center cap in a noticeable place.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
25.
26.
27.
463 464
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
On LX and Canadian DX models
Storing a Flat Tire on the Folded
Third Row Seat
Changing a Flat Tire
464
TIRE MOUNTING
WING BOLT
ATTACHING POINT
SPACER
PLASTIC SCREW
SPACER CONE
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
０７／１１／０８ １９：２８：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４６９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page ).
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .467
480
450
467
Emergency Towing
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Taking Care of the Unexpected
465
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０６：５５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .377
475
143
480
Emergency
Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
IftheEngineWon’tStart
466
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０７：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
The numbers in the illustration
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C, climate
control, audio system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
1.
2.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
467
BOOSTER
BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extremecold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０７：１０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−＋
＋
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
4.
6.
7.
5.
3.
Jump Starting
468
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０７：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
480
CONTINUED
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
469
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０７：２６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat (climate control to
AUTO at ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant
to the radiator up to the base of
the filler neck. If you do not have
the proper coolant mixture
available, you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
480
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency
Towing
470
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０７：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
88
88
363
418
480
On Touring models
On Touring models
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
471
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０７：４４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
The indicator may also come on with
the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page ).
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to
for more information (see
page ).
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, it means one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, continued operation
may cause serious damage.
88
498
On Touring models
Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Readiness Codes
Readiness Codes
Emissions
Testing
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
472
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０７：５２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The brake system
indicator normally
comesonwhenyou
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and as a reminder to
check the parking brake. It will stay
on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
indicator come on with the brake
system indicator, have the vehicle
inspected by your dealer
immediately.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
LOW’’ message on the multi-
information display (see page ).88
88
427
480
On Touring models
On Touring models
Brake System Indicator
Emergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
473
U.S. Canada
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
four fuse boxes (three, if the vehicle
does not have a rear entertainment
system).
To open the passenger’s fuse box,
pull the right edge of the cover.
Theinteriorfuseboxesarelocated
under the dashboard on the driver’s
and passenger’s side.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
on the passenger’s side. To open it,
pushthetabsasshown.
The secondary under-hood fuse box
is behind the primary fuse box.
Fuses
474
DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR FUSE BOX PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIOR
FUSE BOX
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４７９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
through , or the diagram on
thefuseboxlid,whichfuseorfuses
control that device. The diagram for
theinteriordriver’ssidefuseboxis
on the kick panel below the fuse box.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
1.
2.
3. 4.
477 479
CONTINUED
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
475
FUSE
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse.Ifitisblown,replacethefuse
withoneofthesparefusesofthe
same rating or lower.
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. You
should reset the AUTO feature, (see
page ).
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).
5.
6.
187
284
On EX, EX-L and Touring models
Fuses
476
BLOWN
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper
rating for the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：２５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
No.
No.
CONTINUED
Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
Amps. Amps.
Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Left Headlight Low
Rear Defroster Coil
Left Headlight High
Small Lights
Right Headlight High
Right Headlight Low
Back Up
FI ECU (PCM)
Condenser Fan
Not used
Cooling Fan
MG Clutch
1
2
3
4
5
6
40 A
40 A
40 A
20 A
20 A
Not Used
Left Power Sliding Door
Right Power Sliding Door
Power Tailgate
Premium
AC Inverter
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
7
8
9
10
11
Horn, Stop
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
VSA Motor
VSA
Option 1
Option 2
Heater Motor
Passenger’s Fuse Box
Battery
IG1 Main
Power Window Main
Fog Light
ACM
AS power Seat Slide
AS power Seat Recline
Rear Entertainment System
10 A
30 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
70 A
120 A
50 A
50 A
40 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
For some types:
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
477
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：３６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No.No. Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
TPMS
IG Coil
Daytime Running Light
LAF
Radio
Interior Lights
Back Up
Not Used
Front Accessory Socket
OPDS
IG Wiper
Rear Accessory Socket
Left Power Sliding Door
Closer
Driver Power Seat Slide
Pedal Position Adjustment
Dr Power Seat Recline
Power Tailgate Closer
IG ACG
IG Fuel Pump
IG Washer
IG Meter
IG SRS
IGP
Left Rear Power Window
Right Rear Power Window
Passenger’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Window
Moonroof
Not Used
IG HAC
IG SOL
ACC
HAC OP
For some types:
Fuse Locations
478
Front
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Driver’s Side
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：４３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
−
−
−
＊
No. Circuits Protected
No. Circuits Protected
Amps.
Amps.
1STS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Rear Blower
Not Used
DBW
Door Lock
Not Used
Heated Seat
Instrument Panel
Right Power Sliding Door
Closer
Not Used
7.5 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
: For some types
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
479
INTERIOR FUSE BOX UPPER AREA
Driver’s Side
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s Side
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires and lift them off the
ground. The flat tire side (front or
rear)shouldbeliftedbythewheel-
lift equipment. The other two tires
remain on the ground.
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Shift to D position for 5 seconds,
then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
Emergency Towing
480
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the front wheels off
the ground.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０８：５９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
481
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
towing.
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０９：０２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
482
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０９：０４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 484
................................Specifications . 486
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.......................(U.S Vehicles) . 488
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 488
.................................Treadwear . 488
......................................Traction . 488
.............................Temperature . 489
.................................Tire Labeling . 490
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Required Federal
............................Explanation . 492
.......................Emissions Controls . 495
.....................The Clean Air Act . 495
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 495
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 495
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 495
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 496
....................PGM-FI System . 496
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 496
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 496
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 496
....................Replacement Parts . 496
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 497
........................Emissions Testing . 498
....Testing of Readiness Codes . 498
Technical Information
Technical Information
483
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０９：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８８
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
484
CERTIFICATION LABEL
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０９：１３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４８９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on the side of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
485
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
０７／０９／０３ ２１：０９：１７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９０
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
486
Dimensions
Capacities
Air Conditioning
Weights
Engine
202.0 in (5,132 mm)
77.1 in (1,958 mm)
66.8 in (1,697 mm)
66.7 in (1,694 mm)
118.1 in (3,000 mm)
68.8 in (1,748 mm)
70.0 in (1,778 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
0.190 US gal (0.72 )
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
8.0 US qt (7.6 )
3.3 US qt (3.1
)
5.3 US qt (5.0
)
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
2.56 US gal (9.7 )
1.85 US gal (7.0 )
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)
ND-OIL8
HFC-134a (R-134a)
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
See the tire information label atta-
ched to the driver’s doorjamb.
8,410 lbs (3,815 kg)
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.0 : 1
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
VTEC or i-VTEC · VCM ,
6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
10.5 : 1
SKJ16DR-M11
IZFR5K11
ILZKR7B11
SXU22HCR11
Front
Rear
1:
2:
Approx.
21 US gal (80 )
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada Vehicles
NGK:
DENSO:
NGK:
DENSO:
1 : LX and Canadian DX models
2 : EX, EX-L and Touring models
1 : LX, EX and Canadian DX models
2 : EX-L and Touring models
12
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
０７／１１／０８ １９：２８：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
487
Battery
Lights Alignment
Tires
Fuses
Seating Capacities
60 W (HB3)12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21 W
21/5 W
21 W
5W
16 W
2W
8W
3.8 W (2 CP)
Capacity 12 V
12 V
60 AH/5 HR
72 AH/20 HR
Headlights
Fog lights
Front turn signal lights
Front parking/side marker
lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Individual map lights
Vanity mirror lights
Cargo area light
Door courtesy light
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
0°30’
2°32’
235/65R16 103T
235-710R460A 104T
T135/80D17 103M
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Size
Pressure
Interior
Under-hood
Total
Front
Rear
12 V 51 W
12 V 55 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 2 CP
12 V 8 W
12 V 5 W
235/60R17 102T
8/7
2
3/2
3
See page 478 and 479 or the fuse
label attached to the dashboard.
See page 479 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See page 477 or the fuse box
cover.
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
(Amber)
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
Front
Rear
High
Low
:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Second row
Third row
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
(H11)
(HB4)
(Amber)
EX-L models
Except U.S.Touring models (With PAX)
Touring models (Without PAX)
U.S. Touring models (With PAX)
U.S. LX and Canadian DX models
1
2
3
1
4
1
０７／１１／０８ １９：２９：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The tires on your car meet all U.S.
Federal Safety Requirements. All
tires are also graded for treadwear,
traction, and temperature perform-
ance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction
488
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１０：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature
Technical Information
489
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１０：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
R
DOT
B97R
235
T
60
17
102
Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Size
490
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
(1)
(1)
(4) (2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
235/60R17 102T
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１０：３０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Outside diameter of the tire in
millimeters.
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial)
Nominal diameter at the rim
seat in millimeters.
Symmetric
Tire width in millimeters.
The PAX system tires have different
markings from conventional tire
markings. Following is an example of
PAX system tire size with an
explanation of what each component
means.Max Press
Max Load
The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
A
235
710
R
460
104
T
FX6X
2202
Year
Week
If equipped
Tire Labeling (PAX System Tires)
PAX System Tire Labeling
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
Technical Information
491
TM
235-710R460A 104T
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１０：４４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９６
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
All models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
492
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１０：５０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
Except Touring models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Information
493
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１０：５６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
Touring model
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
494
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０４９９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
416
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
495
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：０９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５００
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
496
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：１９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０１
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
The three way catalytic converters
contain precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converters are referred
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx.
Replacement units must be original
Honda parts or their equivalent.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
497
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARM UP
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：２６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０２
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
498
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：３４ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０３
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
for at least 20 minutes. Drive on
the highway in D (A/T). Do not
use the cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
7. 8.
9.
Emissions Testing
Technical Information
499
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：４０ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０４
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
500
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：４２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０５
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
....Customer Service Information . 502
....................Warranty Coverages . 503
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 504
.....................Authorized Manuals . 505
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
501
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０６
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
484
Customer Service Information
502
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Customer Relations
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１１：５３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０７
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
this warranty gives up
to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2008 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2008 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
503
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：０３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０８
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
504
http://www.safercar.gov
http://www.safercar.gov
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５０９
2008 Odyssey
Table Of Contents
Main Menu
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
(U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
505
Publication Form Number
61SHJ03
61SHJ02EL
61SHJ40
31SHJ630
31SHJ810
31SHJM30
31SHJQ30
HON-R
Form Description
2007-08 Honda Odyssey Service Manual
2005-08 Honda Odyssey
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2005 Model Series Honda Odyssey
Body Repair Manual
2008 Honda Odyssey Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda Odyssey
Navigation System Manual
2008 Honda Odyssey
Honda Service History
2008 Honda Odyssey Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate
Year and Model Desired
www. helminc. com
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：１６ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１０
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
506
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１１
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
CONTINUED
....................................Accessories . 368
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.....................................Position) . 144
.............Accessory Power Socket . 203
...........................AC Power Outlet . 203
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 419
...............AdvancedAirbagSystem .30
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 25
..............Air Conditioning System . 210
.....................Rear A/C Control . 216
...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 213, 220
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 443
......................................Antifreeze . 424
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 69, 384
...................................Operation . 384
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 284
Anti-theft Steering Column
............................................Lock . 144
........................................Armrests . 171
...............Audio Controls, Remote . 282
................................Audio System . 221
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23
.Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 138
.............Automatic Speed Control . 319
..............Automatic Transmission . 378
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 486
...............Checking Fluid Level . 425
.......................................Shifting . 378
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 378
................Shift Lever Positions . 379
....................Shift Lock Release . 381
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 283
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 67, 471
............................Jump Starting . 467
..............................Maintenance . 450
............................Specifications . 487
..............................Before Driving . 359
....................................Belts,Seat .8,21
.........................Beverage Holders . 195
.......Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink . 325
..................................Booster Seats . 57
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 384
.............Break-in, New Linings . 360
............Bulb Replacement . 433, 435
...........................................Fluid . 427
.................Pad Wear Indicators . 383
.......................................Parking . 192
.................System Indicator . 69, 473
.............................Braking System . 383
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 360
Brightness Control,
...............................Instruments . 139
......................Brights, Headlights . 136
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 434
..............................Brake Lights . 433
................Front Parking Lights . 431
........Front Side Marker Lights . 431
...........Front Turn Signal Light . 430
.................................Headlights . 429
.........................Rear Bulbs . 433, 434
............Rear Turn Signal Light . 433
............................Specifications . 487
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 429
Index
A
B
INDEX
I
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：２３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１２
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 64
..............Daytime Running Lights . 138
Daytime Running Lights
.......................................Indicator . 73
.................................Dead Battery . 467
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 504
..............Defogger, Rear Window . 140
..............Defrosting the Windows . 214
....................................Dimensions . 486
.............Dimming the Headlights . 136
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 425
..................................Engine Oil . 363
........................Directional Signals . 136
................................Cancel Button . 321
............................Capacities Chart . 486
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 60
..........................Cargo Area Light . 207
....................Cargo, How to Carry . 370
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
.........................................CD Care . 272
..........................CD Changer . 244, 263
CD Changer Error
...........................Messages . 251, 271
.......................................CD Player . 226
...............................Center Pocket . 202
...................................Center Tray . 195
........................Certification Label . 484
.................................Chains, Tires . 447
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 420
......................................When to . 407
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 458
...Charging System Indicator . 67, 471
............Checklist, Before Driving . 376
................Childproof Door Locks . 157
.....................................Child Safety . 38
..............................Booster Seats . 57
...................................Child Seats . 46
.....Important Safety Reminders . 41
..........................................Infants . 43
..........................Larger Children . 47
.........................................LATCH . 48
......................Risks with Airbags . 39
.............................Small Children . 44
.........................................Tethers . 53
........Where Should A Child Sit? . 39
.......................................Child Seats . 43
......LATCH Anchorage System . 48
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 54
Cleaning
...................................Seat Belts . 436
...............Climate Control System . 215
..............................................Clock . 281
.....................Code, Audio System . 284
........................CO in the Exhaust . 495
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 377
......................Compact Spare Tire . 457
.................Consumer Information . 502
.............Controls, Instruments and . 63
....................Conversation Mirror . 198
Coolant
........................................Adding . 422
....................................Checking . 364
.........................Proper Solution . 422
...................Temperature Gauge . 77
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 495
................Cruise Control Indicator . 75
............Cruise Control Operation . 319
...................................Cup Holders . 195
.............Customer Service Office . 502
Index
C
D
II
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：２８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１３
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..............................Economy, Fuel . 365
..................................Emergencies . 453
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 467
...........Brake System Indicator . 473
................Changing a Flat Tire . 458
.....Charging System Indicator . 471
..................Checking the Fuses . 475
...........Driving with a Flat Tire . 449
.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 140
............................Jump Starting . 467
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 471
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 472
..................Overheated Engine . 469
.......................................Towing . 480
.........................Emergency Brake . 192
....................Emergency Flashers . 140
......................Emergency Towing . 480
.......................Emissions Controls . 495
.............Emissions Testing, State . 498
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 77
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 380
.........................If It Won’t Start . 465
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 67, 472
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 67, 471
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 418
...............................Overheating . 469
............................Specifications . 486
.......................................Starting . 377
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 495
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 60
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 496
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 19
...................................Fan, Interior . 211
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 209
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 361
Filters
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 436
...............................................Oil . 420
...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 140
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 458
.............................Floor Mats . 176, 436
.......................Floor Storage Area . 200
Disc Brake Pad Wear
...................................Indicators . 383
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 421
Doors
Auto Door Locking/
...............................unlocking . 152
............Locking and Unlocking . 151
..................Lockout Prevention . 151
..............Manual Sliding Doors . 161
........................Open monitor . 75, 91
....................Power Door Locks . 151
.................Power Sliding Doors . 161
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 488
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 375
....................................Economy . 365
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 184
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 436
....................DVD Error Message . 314
...................................DVD Player . 285
Index
E
F
INDEX
III
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：３３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１４
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 429
...........................HandsFreeLink
. 325
............Hazard Warning Flashers . 140
.....................................Headlights . 136
........................................Aiming . 429
............Automatic Lighting Off . 138
.........Daytime Running Lights . 138
..................High Beam Indicator . 73
.......................Reminder Chime . 136
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 429
.................................Turning on . 136
...................................Headphones . 315
............................Head Restraints . 171
...............................Heated Mirror . 192
...................................Heater, Seat . 183
.....................Heating and Cooling . 210
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 377
...............High-Low Beam Switch . 135
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 322
.......................Hood, Opening the . 362
...........................................Horn .4,133
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 484
Ignition
............................................Keys . 142
.........................................Switch . 144
............Timing Control System . 496
......................Immobilizer System . 143
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 425
..........................................Brake . 427
..........................Power Steering . 428
................Windshield Washers . 424
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 275
........Folding the Third Row Seat . 181
........................Four-way Flashers . 140
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 25
......................................Front Seat . 168
...................Adjusting . 168, 169, 170
.......................................Heaters . 183
.....................................Airbags . 9, 25
.................................................Fuel . 360
......................Fill Door and Cap . 361
...........................................Gauge . 77
................Octane Requirement . 360
....................................Refueling . 361
........................Reserve Indicator . 74
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 475
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 366
.........................................Gasoline . 360
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 74
...........................................Gauge . 77
................Octane Requirement . 360
....................................Refueling . 361
................Gas Station Procedures . 361
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 77
...............................................Fuel . 77
...............................Speedometer . 77
.................................Tachometer . 77
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 397
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
.......................................Rating) . 397
...................................Glove Boxes . 201
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 397
Index
H
I
G
IV
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：３９ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１５
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
CONTINUED
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 460
.......................................Jack, Tire . 459
................................Jump Starting . 467
................................................Keys . 142
.......................Label, Certification . 484
...............Lane Change, Signaling . 136
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 22
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 48
....................Light Control Switch . 205
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 429
.......................................Indicator . 73
.......................................Interior . 205
.......................................Parking . 135
................................Turn Signal . 136
............................Load Limits . 371, 396
....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 144
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
...................................Indicators . 65, 66
......ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 69, 384
Brake (Parking and Brake
...........................System) . 69, 473
................Charging System . 67, 471
.............................Cruise Control . 75
DRL (Daytime Running
.....................................Lights) . 73
Indicators
.....................................Fog Light . 73
.............................Fuel Economy . 75
...................................High Beam . 73
.......Key (Immobilizer System) . 70
.....................................Lights On . 73
......................................Low Fuel . 74
................Low Oil Pressure . 67, 471
......Low Tire Pressure . 71, 388, 391
..................Maintenance Minder . 76
.....................Side Airbag Off . 35, 68
.........................................SRS . 34, 67
.........................System Message . 76
...........................TPMS . 72, 389, 392
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 72
Vehicle Stability Assist
..........................(VSA) System . 70
............................VSA Activation . 70
..............................Washer Level . 74
..................Individual Map Lights . 206
...............................Infant Restraint . 43
......................................Infant Seats . 45
......LATCH Anchorage System . 48
...........................Lower Anchors . 48
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 54
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 443
...................In-Floor Storage Area . 200
.................................Inside Mirror . 190
.............................Inspection, Tire . 444
......................Instrument Panel . 4, 133
......Instrument Panel Brightness . 139
....................Integrated Sunshade . 197
...............................Interior Lights . 205
........................................Introduction . i
Index
J
K
L
INDEX
V
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：４５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１６
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Locks
.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 144
............................Fuel Fill Door . 361
..................................Glove Box . 201
..................Lockout Prevention . 151
...............................Power Door . 151
.............................Sliding Doors . 161
......................................Tailgate . 157
........................Low Coolant Level . 364
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 74
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 67, 471
.........................Lower Anchors . 48, 50
..........................Lower Glove Box . 201
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 486
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 370
..................................Maintenance . 405
................................Minder . 407-416
.........................Minder Indicator . 76
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 415
..........................................Safety . 406
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 67, 472
...................Manual Sliding Doors . 161
...............................Meters, Gauges . 77
..................Michelin PAX System . 454
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 190
.................................Modifications . 369
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 368
.......................................Moonroof . 189
Moving the Second Row Bucket
.............................................Seat . 175
.............Multi-Information Display . 81
...................Neutral Gear Position . 379
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 360
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 484
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 360
...................................Odometer . 78, 85
.........................Odometer, Trip . 78, 86
Oil
........................Change, How to . 420
......................Change, When to . 407
......................Checking Engine . 363
..............Pressure Indicator . 67, 471
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 419
.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 144
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 495
............................Outside Mirrors . 191
....................Overheating, Engine . 469
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 415
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 360
............Panel Brightness Control . 139
........................Park Gear Position . 379
...........................................Parking . 382
...............................Parking Brake . 192
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 69, 473
...............................Parking Lights . 136
................Parking Sensor System . 352
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 382
....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 35
...................................PAX System . 454
.............................PGM-FI System . 496
........................Power Door Locks . 151
Index
M
N
P
O
VI
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：５１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１７
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Power Sliding Doors
.......................................Indicator . 75
...................................Operation . 161
.....................................Switches . 162
...............Power Socket Locations . 194
..............................Power Tailgate . 158
............................Power Windows . 186
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 38
.......................Protecting Infants . 43
.......Protecting Larger Children . 56
.........Protecting Small Children . 44
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 53
.............................Using LATCH . 48
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 21
............Safety Defects, Reporting . 504
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 61
...............................Safety Messages . ii
...................Radiator Overheating . 469
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 221
...........................Readiness Codes . 472
............Rear Audio Control Panel . 290
...............................Rear A/C Unit . 216
........Rear Entertainment System . 285
Rear Lights, Bulb
......................Replacement . 433, 434
...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 356
..........................Rear View Mirror . 190
...............Rear Window Defogger . 140
Rear Window Wiper and
.......................................Washer . 135
.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 168, 170
.Reclining the Second Row Seats . 168
.....Reclining the Third Row Seat . 169
.................Reminder Indicators . 65, 66
................Remote Audio Controls . 282
................Remote Control (RES) . 312
.....................Remote Transmitter . 145
Removing the Second Row
...........................................Seats . 177
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 420
..........................................Fuses . 474
................................Light Bulbs . 429
................................Timing Belt . 428
...........................................Tires . 446
.............................Wiper Blades . 437
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 24
Reserve Tank,
.................Engine Coolant . 364, 422
..............Retractable Center Tray . 195
..................Reverse Gear Position . 379
......................................Roof Rack . 373
................................Rotation, Tire . 445
Index
S
R
INDEX
VII
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１２：５７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１８
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 21
...............Additional Information . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 23
.....................................Cleaning . 436
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22
................................Maintenance . 24
Reminder Indicator and
................................Beeper . 21, 68
................................Replacement . 24
...................System Components . 21
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15
..................................Seat Heaters . 183
...............................................Seats . 167
..............Adjustments . 168, 169, 170
..........Drivers Lumbar Support . 170
....Folding the Third Row Seat . 181
........................Head Restraints . 171
.....Manual Height Adjustment . 169
....................Passenger Seating . 167
.Reclining the Third Row Seat . 169
Removing the Second Row
.......................................Seats . 177
Removing the Second Row
........................Plus-One Seat . 178
............Third Row Seat Access . 174
............................Security System . 318
Sensors
Front Passenger’s Weight
.....................................Sensors . 30
....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 30
...............................Serial Number . 484
...........................Service Intervals . 407
.............................Service Manual . 505
...........Service Station Procedure . 361
..........................Setting the Clock . 281
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 378
........................Shift Lock Release . 381
................................Side Airbags . 9, 31
..........................Off Indicator . 35, 68
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 431
.............................Signaling Turns . 136
.................................Sliding Doors . 161
.....................................Snow Tires . 447
................................Sound System . 221
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 457
............................Specifications . 487
....................Specifications Charts . 486
................................Speed Control . 319
...................................Speedometer . 77
..........SRS, Additional Information . 25
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
.............................Airbag Service . 36
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34
How Your Airbags
............................Work . 27, 31, 33
........................SRS Components . 25
.............................SRS Indicator . 34, 67
..START (Ignition Key Position) . 144
.......................Starting the Engine . 377
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 377
................With a Dead Battery . 467
..............State Emissions Testing . 498
........Steam Coming from Engine . 469
Steering Wheel
................................Adjustment . 141
...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 144
.........................Buttons . 82, 282, 319
...................Stereo Sound System . 221
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 451
..........Second Row Plus-One Seat . 178
........................Sunglasses Holder . 197
........................................Sun Visor . 198
Index
VIII
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１３：０１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５１９
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Supplemental Restraint System
......................................Servicing . 36
.........................SRS Indicator . 34, 67
...................System Components . 25
..................................Synthetic Oil . 419
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 453
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 488
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 360
...........................Upper Glove Box . 201
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 421
................................Vanity Mirror . 199
.....................................Tachometer . 77
..........................................Tailgate . 157
.......................Opening the . 157, 158
.......Open Monitor Indicator . 75, 91
..Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 433, 434
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 453
Technical Descriptions
.....Emissions Control Systems . 495
Three Way Catalytic
.......................Converter . 496, 497
.......................Temperature Gauge . 77
........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 220
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 23
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 54
............................Theft Protection . 284
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 497
Tilt and Telescoping the
.........................Steering Wheel . 141
..........................Time, Setting the . 281
....................................Timing Belt . 428
....................................Tire Chains . 447
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 458
...............................................Tires . 442
..............................Air Pressure . 442
...................................Balancing . 445
.........................Checking Wear . 444
..........................Compact Spare . 457
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 488
......................................Inflation . 442
..................................Inspection . 444
.....................................Labeling . 490
...................................Replacing . 446
......................................Rotating . 445
................................Service Life . 445
...........................................Snow . 447
............................Specifications . 487
................................Tire Chains . 447
Tire Pressure Monitoring
............System (TPMS) . 388, 391
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 458
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 396
................Emergency Wrecker . 480
....Equipment and Accessories . 398
.............................Weight Limit . 396
.............................Trailer Loading . 396
......................Trailer Towing Tips . 402
Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 425
...........................Fluid Selection . 426
..............Identification Number . 485
.............Shifting the Automatic . 378
.....................................Treadwear . 488
.................................Trip Meter . 78, 86
..................................Turn Signals . 136
Index
U
V
T
INDEX
IX
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１３：０７ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５２０
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 61
....................Warranty Coverages . 503
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 424
............................Level Indicator . 74
...................................Operation . 134
Wheels
.............Adjusting the Steering . 141
............Alignment and Balance . 445
..........................Compact Spare . 457
......................................Wrench . 461
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 186
................Operating the Power . 186
.........................Rear, Defogger . 140
Windshield
.....................................Cleaning . 134
...................................Defroster . 214
.....................................Washers . 134
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 437
...................................Operation . 134
Rear Windshield Wiper and
...................................Washer . 135
..................Wireless Headphones . 315
....................................Worn Tires . 444
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 480
.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 371, 396
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 486
....Vehicle Identification Number . 484
.............................Vehicle Storage . 451
.....................................Ventilation . 213
.................................................VIN . 484
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 419
Index
W
X
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１３：１１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５２１
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１３：１３ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５２２
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１３：１５ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５２３
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
０７／０９／０３ ２１：１３：１８ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５２４
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) (see page
).
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
)
Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
)
Front:
Front:
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
)
Rear:
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
)
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
21 US gal (80
)
426
428
427
EX-L models:
All models except U.S. Touring
models with PAX system
418
LX, EX, Touring models and
Canadian DX models:
０７／１１／０８ １９：３９：２１ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０５２５
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Odyssey. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SHJC30
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
０７／０９／０３ ２０：０３：１２ ３１ＳＨＪ６３０ ０００１
2008 Odyssey
Main Menu
